Mercedes Benz B-Class Electric Drive User Manual

B-Class Electric Drive Operator's Manual B-Class Electric Drive
Operator's Manual
2425842200t
2425842200
Order no. 65155605 13 Part no. 2425842200 Edition C 2014

Symbols X This symbol indicates an instruction Publication details
Registered trademarks: that must be followed. Internet
RBluetooth X Several of these symbols in succes-
is a registered trademark of
sion indicate an instruction with sev- Further information about Mercedes-Benz
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
eral steps. vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
(Y This symbol tells you where you can on the following websites:
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
page) find more information about a topic. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
of DOLBY Laboratories.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or an http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
RBabySmart, ESP and PRE-SAFE are
instruction that is continued on the only)
registered trademarks of Daimler AG. next page. http://www.mercedes-benz.ca
RHomeLink is a registered trademark of
Dis This font indicates a display in the
Johnson Controls. play multifunction display/COMAND dis-
RiPod and iTunes are registered trade- play. Editorial office
marks of Apple Inc. Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-
RMicrosoft and Windows media are reg- Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
tected by copyright 2005
istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- The FreeType Project or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
tion. http://www.freetype.org. All rights without written permission from Daimler AG.
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius reserved.
XM Radio Inc.
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-
Vehicle manufacturer
uity Digital Corporation.
Daimler AG
RGracenote is a registered trademark of
Mercedesstrae 137
Gracenote, Inc.
70327 Stuttgart
RZAGATSurvey and related brands are reg-
istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC. Germany
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
As at 26.11.2013
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-
tions and warning notices in this manual.
Ignoring them could result in damage to the
vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry specification
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2425842200 2425842200t
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 29
Introduction ......................................... 19 Safety ................................................... 39
Opening and closing ........................... 71
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 85
Lights and windshield wipers ............ 97
Climate control ................................. 113
Driving and parking .......................... 125
On-board computer and displays .... 171
Stowage and features ...................... 227
Maintenance and care ...................... 251
Breakdown Assistance ..................... 263
Wheels and tires ............................... 277
Technical data ................................... 307

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Setting the center air vents ........... 123

Setting the side air vents ............... 123
12 V socket see Climate control
see Sockets Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
A Ambient lighting
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Setting the brightness (on-board
Display message ............................ 191 computer) ...................................... 188
Function/notes ................................ 63 Antenna ................................................ 23
Important safety notes .................... 63 Anti-lock braking system
Warning lamp ................................. 218 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Accident Anti-Theft Alarm system
Automatic measures after an acci- see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
dent ................................................. 56 Ashtray ............................................... 236
Activating/deactivating cooling Assistance display (on-board com-
with air dehumidification ................. 116 puter) .................................................. 183
Active Parking Assist Assistance menu (on-board com-
Canceling ....................................... 163 puter) .................................................. 183
Detecting parking spaces .............. 160 ASSYST PLUS
Display message ............................ 210 Displaying a service message ........ 255
Exiting a parking space .................. 162 Hiding a service message .............. 255
Function/notes ............................. 159 Notes ............................................. 254
Important safety notes .................. 159 Resetting the service interval dis-
Parking .......................................... 161 play ................................................ 255
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 68 Service message ............................ 254
Adaptive Brake Assist Special service requirements ......... 255
Display message ............................ 200 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Function/notes ................................ 65 Activating/deactivating ................... 69
Additional speedometer ................... 187 Function ........................................... 69
Air bags Switching off the alarm .................... 69
Deployment ..................................... 54 ATTENTION ASSIST
Display message ............................ 203 Activating/deactivating ................. 184
Front air bag (driver, front Display message ............................ 208
passenger) ....................................... 47 Function/notes ............................. 166
Important safety notes .................... 46 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 180
Introduction ..................................... 46 Audio system
Knee bag .......................................... 48 see separate operating instructions
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
lamps ............................................... 41 see Qualified specialist workshop
Side impact air bag .......................... 48 Authorized workshop
Window curtain air bag .................... 48 see Qualified specialist workshop
Air-conditioning system AUTO lights
see Climate control Display message ............................ 207
Air vents see Lights
Important safety notes .................. 123 Automatic car wash (care) ............... 256
Setting ........................................... 123 Automatic headlamp mode ................ 98
Index 5
B Breakdown
Towing away .................................. 271
Backup lamp see Flat tire
Changing bulbs .............................. 106 Brightness control (instrument
Display message ............................ 206 cluster lighting) ................................... 31
Bag hook ............................................ 232 Bulbs
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 63 see Replacing bulbs
Battery
Display message ............................ 215 C
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 74 Calling up a malfunction
Important safety notes .................... 74 see Display messages
Replacing ......................................... 74 Car
Battery (vehicle) see Vehicle
Charging ........................................ 268 Care
Display message ............................ 207 Carpets .......................................... 262
Important safety notes .................. 265 Car wash ........................................ 256
Jump starting ................................. 269 Display ........................................... 260
Belt Exterior lights ................................ 259
see Seat belts Gear or selector lever .................... 261
Blind Spot Assist Interior ........................................... 260
Activating/deactivating ................. 184 Matte finish ................................... 258
Display message ............................ 209 Notes ............................................. 256
Notes/function .............................. 167 Paint .............................................. 257
Brake Assist Plastic trim .................................... 260
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Power washer ................................ 257
Brake fluid Rear view camera .......................... 260
Display message ............................ 199 Roof lining ...................................... 262
Notes ............................................. 309 Seat belt ........................................ 262
Brake lamps Seat cover ..................................... 261
Changing bulbs .............................. 106 Sensors ......................................... 259
Display message ............................ 205 Steering wheel ............................... 261
Brakes Trim pieces .................................... 261
ABS .................................................. 63 Washing by hand ........................... 256
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 65 Wheels ........................................... 258
BAS .................................................. 63 Windows ........................................ 258
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 309 Wiper blades .................................. 259
Display message ............................ 191 Wooden trim .................................. 261
HOLD function ............................... 154 Cargo compartment cover ............... 232
Important safety notes .................. 148 Cargo compartment enlargement ... 230
Maintenance .................................. 150 Important safety notes .................. 230
Parking brake ................................ 145 Cargo compartment floor
Riding tips ...................................... 148 Height adjustment ......................... 234
Warning lamp ................................. 218 Important safety notes .................. 233
Brake system Opening/closing ............................ 233
Driving safety systems ..................... 68 Stowage well (under) ..................... 233
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 231
6 Index
Center console Climate control

Lower section .................................. 35 Automatic climate control (dual-
Upper section .................................. 34 zone) .............................................. 115
Central locking Auxiliary climate control (on-
Automatic locking (on-board com- board computer) ............................ 186
puter) ............................................. 188 Controlling automatically ............... 117
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 72 Convenience opening/closing
Changing bulbs (air-recirculation mode) ................. 120
Brake lamps ................................... 106 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 116
High-beam headlamps ................... 105 Defrosting the windows ................. 119
Low-beam headlamps .................... 104 Defrosting the windshield .............. 118
Parking lamps ................................ 105 Immediate pre-entry climate con-
Rear fog lamp ................................ 106 trol ................................................. 122
Reversing lamps ............................ 106 Important safety notes .................. 114
Standing lamps (front) ................... 105 Indicator lamp ................................ 117
Tail lamps ...................................... 106 Maximum cooling .......................... 119
Turn signals (front) ......................... 105 Notes on using dual-zone auto-
Turn signals (rear) .......................... 106 matic climate control ..................... 115
Charge level display .......................... 174 Overview of systems ...................... 114
Charging Pre-entry climate control at
see Charging the high-voltage battery departure time ............................... 122
Charging cable Pre-entry climate control at time
Connecting .................................... 139 of departure (on-board computer) .. 186
Controls ......................................... 138 Pre-entry climate control via key ... 121
Important safety notes .................. 137 Pre-entry climate control via key
Removing ....................................... 140 (on-board computer) ...................... 186
Storing ........................................... 138 Problems with cooling with air
Warming up ................................... 137 dehumidification ............................ 117
Charging the high-voltage battery Problem with the rear window
(important safety notes) ................... 134 defroster ........................................ 120
Child-proof locks Refrigerant ..................................... 311
Important safety notes .................... 61 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 311
Rear doors ....................................... 62 Setting the air distribution ............. 117
Children Setting the airflow ......................... 118
In the vehicle ................................... 56 Setting the air vents ...................... 123
Restraint systems ............................ 57 Setting the temperature ................ 117
Special seat belt retractor ............... 57 Switching air-recirculation mode
Child seat on/off ............................................ 120
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 60 Switching on/off ........................... 116
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Switching the rear window
anchors ............................................ 58 defroster on/off ............................ 119
On the front-passenger seat ............ 60 Switching the ZONE function on/
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 60 off .................................................. 118
Top Tether ....................................... 59 Cockpit ................................................. 30
Cigarette lighter ................................ 236 see Instrument cluster
Index 7
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST D

Activating/deactivating the dis-
tance warning function .................. 184 Dashboard
Display message ............................ 191 see Cockpit
Operation/notes .............................. 64 Data
Combination switch .......................... 100 see Technical data
Compass Daytime running lamps
Calibrating ..................................... 249 Display message ............................ 206
Calling up ....................................... 248 Switching on/off (on-board com-
Setting ........................................... 249 puter) ............................................. 187
Consumption statistics (on-board Switching on/off (switch) ................ 98
computer) .......................................... 177 Declarations of conformity ................. 24
Convenience closing feature .............. 82 Delayed switch-off
Convenience opening/closing (air- Interior lighting .............................. 188
recirculation mode) ........................... 120 Departure time
Convenience opening feature ............ 82 Setting (on-board computer) .......... 185
Coolant Diagnostics connection ...................... 24
Service product ............................. 309 Digital speedometer ......................... 177
Coolant (engine) DIRECT SELECT lever
Checking the level ......................... 253 Transmission ................................. 129
Cooling Display
see Climate control High-voltage battery charge level
Copyright ............................................. 27 (instrument cluster) ....................... 174
Cornering light function Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 260
Display message ............................ 204 Display messages
Crash-responsive emergency light- ASSYST PLUS ................................ 254
ing ....................................................... 102 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 190
Cruise control Drive system .................................. 207
Driving systems ............................. 208
Activation conditions ..................... 153
General notes ................................ 190
Cruise control lever ....................... 152
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 190
Deactivating ................................... 154
Lights ............................................. 204
Display message ............................ 210
Safety systems .............................. 191
Driving system ............................... 152
SmartKey ....................................... 215
Important safety notes .................. 152
Tires ............................................... 211
Setting a speed .............................. 153
Vehicle ........................................... 212
Storing and maintaining current
Distance recorder ............................. 176
speed ............................................. 153
Cup holder see Odometer
see Trip odometer
Center console .............................. 235
Distance warning function
see Cup holder Activating/deactivating ................. 184
Customer Assistance Center Function/notes ................................ 64
(CAC) ..................................................... 25 Warning lamp ................................. 225
Door control panel .............................. 37
Customer Relations Department ....... 25
8 Index
Doors Driving tips

Automatic locking (on-board com- Brakes ........................................... 148
puter) ............................................. 188 Break-in period .............................. 126
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 78 Checking brake lining thickness .... 150
Central locking/unlocking Downhill gradient ........................... 149
(SmartKey) ....................................... 72 Drinking and driving ....................... 147
Display message ............................ 214 Driving in winter ............................. 152
Emergency locking ........................... 79 Driving on flooded roads ................ 151
Emergency unlocking ....................... 79 Driving on wet roads ...................... 151
Important safety notes .................... 77 Energy ........................................... 147
Opening (from inside) ...................... 77 General .......................................... 147
Drinking and driving ......................... 147 Hydroplaning ................................. 151
Driver's door Icy road surfaces ........................... 152
see Doors Limited braking efficiency on sal-
Drive system ted roads ....................................... 149
Jump-starting ................................. 269 Snow chains .................................. 280
Starting with the SmartKey ............ 127 Wet road surface ........................... 149
Switching off .................................. 145 DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 181
Driving abroad DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 181
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 256
Driving on flooded roads .................. 151 E
Driving safety systems EBD (electronic brake force distri-
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 63 bution)
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 68 Display message ............................ 195
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 65 Function/notes ................................ 66
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 63 ECELL display ................................... 173
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 64
ECO display
Distance warning function ............... 64
Function/notes ............................. 148
Electronic brake force distribu-
On-board computer ....................... 177
tion .................................................. 66
Electric motor number ...................... 308
ESP (Electronic Stability Pro-
Electronic Stability Program
gram) ............................................... 66
ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 66 see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
Important safety information ........... 63 Emergency
Overview .......................................... 62 Automatic measures after an acci-
RBS .................................................. 68 dent ................................................. 56
STEER CONTROL ............................. 68 Emergency release
Driving systems Driver's door .................................... 79
Active Parking Assist ..................... 159 Vehicle ............................................. 79
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 166 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 167 Activation ......................................... 54
Cruise control ................................ 152 Emergency unlocking
Display message ............................ 208 Tailgate ............................................ 80
HOLD function ............................... 154 Energy
PARKTRONIC ................................. 155 Driving tips .................................... 147
Rear view camera .......................... 163 Environmental protection
Note ................................................. 19
Index 9
ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- Glove box ........................................... 229

gram)
Characteristics ................................. 67 H
Deactivating/activating ................. 183
Handbrake
Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 67
see Parking brake
Display message ............................ 191
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 100
ETS .................................................. 66
Display message ............................ 215
Function/notes ................................ 66
Headlamps
General notes .................................. 66
Important safety information ........... 67 Cleaning system (notes) ................ 310
Warning lamp ................................. 221 Fogging up ..................................... 101
ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 66 see Automatic headlamp mode
Head restraints
Exterior lighting
Adjusting ......................................... 89
Setting options ................................ 98
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 90
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 89
Adjusting ......................................... 93
Adjusting (rear) ................................ 90
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 93
Installing/removing (rear) ................ 90
Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 93
Heating
Storing settings (memory func-
see Climate control
tion) ................................................. 95
High-beam headlamps
Storing the parking position ............. 94
Changing bulbs .............................. 105
Display message ............................ 205
F
Switching on/off ........................... 100
Flat tire High voltage
MOExtended tires .......................... 264 see Safety notes
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 264 High-voltage battery
Floormats ........................................... 249 Battery care ................................... 136
Fuses Charging (charging station) ............ 140
Allocation chart ............................. 275 Charging (mains socket) ................ 137
Before changing ............................. 274 Charging cable warming ................ 137
Fuse box in the engine compart- Cruise range .................................. 136
ment .............................................. 275 Discharged battery ........................ 135
Fuse box in the front-passenger Display message ............................ 208
footwell .......................................... 275 Energy consumption ...................... 136
Important safety notes .................. 274 General notes ................................ 135
Method of operation ...................... 135
G Outside temperatures .................... 135
Overvoltage protection .................. 137
Garage door opener
Problems with the charging proc-
Clearing the memory ..................... 248 ess ................................................. 142
Important safety notes .................. 245 Reserve, warning lamp ................... 224
Opening/closing the garage door .. 248 Terms of use .................................. 137
Programming (button in the rear- High-voltage disconnect device ......... 23
view mirror) ................................... 245
Hill start assist .................................. 128
Gear or selector lever (cleaning
HOLD function
guidelines) ......................................... 261
Activating ....................................... 155
Genuine parts ...................................... 19
Deactivating ................................... 155
10 Index
Display message ............................ 209 K

Function/notes ............................. 154
Hood Kickdown
Closing ........................................... 253 Driving tips .................................... 131
Display message ............................ 214 Knee bag .............................................. 48
Opening ......................................... 252 L
Horn ...................................................... 30 Lamps
Hydroplaning ..................................... 151 see Warning and indicator lamps
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
I anchors ................................................ 58
Ignition lock License plate lamp (display mes-
see Key positions sage) ................................................... 205
Immobilizer .......................................... 69 Lights
Indicator lamps Activating/deactivating the inte-
see Warning and indicator lamps rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 188
Indicators Automatic headlamp mode .............. 98
see Turn signals Display message ............................ 204
Instrument cluster Hazard warning lamps ................... 100
High beam flasher .......................... 100
Charge level display ......................... 31
High-beam headlamps ................... 100
Overview .......................................... 31
Light switch ..................................... 98
Power display ................................ 173
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 99
Settings ......................................... 187
Parking lamps .................................. 99
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32
Rear fog lamp .................................. 99
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 172
Setting the brightness of the
Interior lighting ................................. 101
ambient lighting (on-board com-
Automatic control .......................... 102
puter) ............................................. 188
Delayed switch-off (on-board
Standing lamps .............................. 100
computer) ...................................... 188
Switching the daytime running
Emergency lighting ........................ 102
lamps on/off (on-board com-
Manual control ............................... 102
puter) ............................................. 187
Overview ........................................ 101
Switching the daytime running
Reading lamp ................................. 101
lamps on/off (switch) ...................... 98
Setting the brightness of the
Turn signals ................................... 100
ambient lighting (on-board com-
see Interior lighting
puter) ............................................. 188
see Lights
Internet connection
see Replacing bulbs
Via mobile service module ............. 144 Light sensor (display message) ....... 207
Loading guidelines ............................ 228
J
Locking
Jack see Central locking
Storage location ............................ 264 Locking (doors)
Using ............................................. 300 Automatic ........................................ 78
Emergency locking ........................... 79
From inside (central locking but-
ton) .................................................. 78
Index 11
Locking centrally Memory function ................................. 95

see Central locking Message memory (on-board com-
Locking verification signal (on- puter) .................................................. 190
board computer) ............................... 188 Messages
Low-beam headlamps see Display messages
Changing bulbs .............................. 104 Mirrors
Display message ............................ 204 see Exterior mirrors
Switching on/off .............................. 99 see Rear-view mirror
Lumbar support see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- Mobile phone
port .................................................. 91 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 181
Modifying the programming
M (SmartKey) ........................................... 73
MOExtended tires .............................. 264
M+S tires ............................................ 280
Mounting wheels
Maintenance
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 303
see ASSYST PLUS
Mounting a new wheel ................... 302
Malfunction message
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 300
see Display messages
Raising the vehicle ......................... 300
Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
Removing a wheel .......................... 302
tions) .................................................. 258
Securing the vehicle against roll-
Maximum charge current
ing away ........................................ 300
Setting (charging cable) ................. 138 MP3
mbrace
Operation ....................................... 181
Call priority .................................... 241 see separate operating instructions
Display message ............................ 199 Multifunction display
Downloading destinations
Function/notes ............................. 176
(COMAND) ..................................... 241
Permanent display ......................... 187
Downloading routes ....................... 244
Multifunction steering wheel
Emergency call .............................. 238
Operating the on-board computer .. 174
General notes ................................ 237
Overview .......................................... 33
Geo fencing ................................... 245
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 243
N
MB info call button ........................ 240
Remote fault diagnosis .................. 243 Navigation
Remote vehicle locking .................. 243 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 179
Roadside Assistance button .......... 240 see separate operating instructions
Search & Send ............................... 242 Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
Self-test ......................................... 238 cle ....................................................... 126
Speed alert .................................... 244
System .......................................... 238 O
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 245
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 243 Occupant Classification System
Mechanical key (OCS)
Function/notes ................................ 73 Conditions ....................................... 49
Locking vehicle ................................ 79 Faults ............................................... 53
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 79
Memory card (audio) ......................... 181
12 Index
Operation ......................................... 49 Overhead control panel ...................... 36

System self-test ............................... 51 Override feature
Occupant safety Rear side windows ........................... 62
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent ................................................. 56 P
Children in the vehicle ..................... 56
Important safety notes .................... 41 Paint code number ............................ 308
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 62 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 257
OCS Panic alarm .......................................... 40
Conditions ....................................... 49 Parking ............................................... 144
Faults ............................................... 53 Important safety notes .................. 144
Operation ......................................... 49 Parking brake ................................ 145
System self-test ............................... 51 Position of exterior mirror, front-
On-board computer passenger side ................................. 94
Assistance menu ........................... 183 Rear view camera .......................... 163
Audio menu ................................... 180 see Active Parking Assist
Displaying a service message ........ 255 see PARKTRONIC
Display messages .......................... 190 Parking aid
ECELL menu ................................. 185 Active Parking Assist ..................... 159
Factory settings submenu ............. 189 see Exterior mirrors
Important safety notes .................. 172 see PARKTRONIC
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 187 Parking assistance
Lighting submenu .......................... 187 see PARKTRONIC
Menu overview .............................. 176 Parking brake
Message memory .......................... 190 Display message ............................ 196
Navigation menu ............................ 179 Electric parking brake .................... 145
Operation ....................................... 174 Warning lamp ................................. 223
Service menu ................................. 184 see Parking brake
Settings menu ............................... 185 Parking lamps
Standard display ............................ 176 Switching on/off .............................. 99
Telephone menu ............................ 181 Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 105
Trip menu ...................................... 176 PARKTRONIC
Vehicle submenu ........................... 188 Deactivating/activating ................. 157
Video DVD operation ..................... 181 Driving system ............................... 155
On-board computer (multifunction Function/notes ............................. 155
steering wheel) Important safety notes .................. 155
Range ............................................ 178 Problem (malfunction) ................... 159
Online access .................................... 143 Range of the sensors ..................... 156
Opening and closing the side trim Warning display ............................. 157
panels ................................................. 105 PASSENGER AIR BAG
Operating safety Indicator lamps ................................ 41
Declaration of conformity ................ 24 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Operating system Problems (malfunction) .................. 203
see On-board computer Pets in the vehicle ............................... 62
Operator's Manual Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-
Vehicle equipment ........................... 20 tions) .................................................. 260
Outside temperature display ........... 173 Power display .................................... 173
Index 13
Power washers .................................. 257 Rear-view mirror

Power windows Anti-glare (manual) .......................... 93
see Side windows Dipping (automatic) ......................... 93
Program selector button .................. 131 Rear window defroster
Pulling away ...................................... 128 Problem (malfunction) ................... 120
Switching on/off ........................... 119
Q Rear window wiper
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 110
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 24 Switching on/off ........................... 109
Recuperative braking system (rbs) ... 68
R Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
Radar sensor system tem)
Activating/deactivating ................. 188 Important safety notes .................. 311
Display message ............................ 209 Remote control
Radio Garage door opener ....................... 245
Selecting a station ......................... 180 Programming (garage door
see separate operating instructions opener) .......................................... 245
Radio-wave reception/transmis- Replacing bulbs
sion in the vehicle Important safety notes .................. 102
Declaration of conformity ................ 24 Overview of bulb types .................. 103
Range Removing/replacing the cover
Calling up (on-board computer, (front wheel arch) .......................... 104
luxury multifunction steering Reporting safety defects .................... 25
wheel) ............................................ 178 Reserve
RANGE PLUS ................................. 136 High-voltage battery ...................... 224
RANGE PLUS Restraint system
Range ............................................ 136 Display message ............................ 200
RBS Introduction ..................................... 40
see Recuperative braking system Warning lamp ................................. 224
(RBS) ................................................ 68 Warning lamp (function) ................... 41
Reading lamp ..................................... 101 Reverse gear
READY indicator ................................ 172 Engaging ........................................ 130
Rear fog lamp Reversing feature
Changing bulbs .............................. 106 Side windows ................................... 81
Display message ............................ 206 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 21
Switching on/off .............................. 99 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
Rear lamps guidelines) ......................................... 262
Changing bulbs .............................. 106 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 311
see Lights Route (navigation)
Rear seat see Route guidance (navigation)
Folding the backrest forwards/ Route guidance (navigation) ............ 179
back (vehicles without the EASY-
VARIO-PLUS system) ..................... 231
Rear view camera
Cleaning instructions ..................... 260
Function/notes ............................. 163
Switching on/off ........................... 164
14 Index
S Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-

tem) ............................................... 311
Safety Washer fluid ................................... 310
Children in the vehicle ..................... 56 Settings
Child restraint systems .................... 57 Factory (on-board computer) ......... 189
Occupant Classification System On-board computer ....................... 185
(OCS) ............................................... 49 Setting the air distribution ............... 117
Safety notes ......................................... 21 Setting the airflow ............................ 118
Safety system Setting the maximum charge cur-
see Driving safety systems rent (Control system) ........................ 186
Seat belts Side impact air bag ............................. 48
Adjusting the height ......................... 44 Side marker lamp (display mes-
center rear-compartment seat ......... 45 sage) ................................................... 206
Cleaning ......................................... 262
Side windows
Correct usage .................................. 43
Cleaning ......................................... 258
Fastening ......................................... 44
Convenience closing feature ............ 82
Important safety guidelines ............. 42
Convenience opening feature .......... 82
Introduction ..................................... 42
Important safety information ........... 81
Releasing ......................................... 45
Opening/closing .............................. 81
Warning lamp ................................. 216
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 84
Warning lamp (function) ................... 45
Resetting ......................................... 83
Seats
SmartKey
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 89
Changing the battery ....................... 74
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 88
Changing the programming ............. 73
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Checking the battery ....................... 74
port .................................................. 91
Convenience closing feature ............ 82
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 89
Convenience opening feature .......... 82
Cleaning the cover ......................... 261
Display message ............................ 215
Correct driver's seat position ........... 86
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 72
Folding the backrest (rear com-
Important safety notes .................... 72
partment) forwards/back (vehi-
Loss ................................................. 76
cles without the EASY-VARIO-
Mechanical key ................................ 73
PLUS system) ................................ 231
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 127
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 76
Seat heating problem ...................... 92
SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 127
Storing settings (memory func-
Snow chains ...................................... 280
tion) ................................................. 95
Switching seat heating on/off ......... 91 Sockets
Selector lever General notes ................................ 237
see DIRECT SELECT lever Luggage compartment ................... 237
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 259 Rear compartment ......................... 237
Specialist workshop ............................ 24
Service Center
Special seat belt retractor .................. 57
see Qualified specialist workshop
Service menu (on-board com- Speed, controlling
puter) .................................................. 184 see Cruise control
Service products Speedometer
Brake fluid ..................................... 309 Activating/deactivating the addi-
Important safety notes .................. 309 tional speedometer ........................ 187
Index 15
Digital ............................................ 177 Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 80

In the Instrument cluster ................. 31 Opening dimensions ...................... 311
Selecting the unit of measure- Tail lamps
ment .............................................. 187 Display message ............................ 205
see Instrument cluster see Lights
SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- Technical data
tem) Capacities ...................................... 309
see Restraint system Information .................................... 308
Standing lamps Tires/wheels ................................. 303
Changing bulbs .............................. 105 Vehicle data ................................... 311
Display message ............................ 206 Telephone
Switching on/off ........................... 100 Accepting a call ............................. 182
Starting (vehicle) ............................... 127 Display message ............................ 214
STEER CONTROL .................................. 68 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 181
Steering (display message) .............. 214 Number from the phone book ........ 182
Steering wheel Redialing ........................................ 183
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 92 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 182
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 174 Temperature
Cleaning ......................................... 261 Outside temperature ...................... 173
Important safety notes .................... 92 Setting (climate control) ................ 117
Paddle shifters ............................... 131 Theft deterrent systems
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 131 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 69
Stowage areas ................................... 228 Immobilizer ...................................... 69
Stowage compartments Time
Armrest (front) ............................... 229 see separate operating instructions
Armrest (under) ............................. 229 Tire pressure
Center console (rear) ..................... 230 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 284
Cup holders ................................... 234 Checking manually ........................ 284
Glove box ....................................... 229 Display message ............................ 211
Important safety information ......... 228 Important safety notes .................. 284
Stowage net ................................... 230 Maximum ....................................... 284
Under driver's seat/front- Notes ............................................. 283
passenger seat .............................. 230 Recommended ............................... 281
Stowage net ....................................... 230 see Tire pressure
Summer tires ..................................... 280 Tire pressure monitor
Sun visor ............................................ 235 Checking the tire pressure elec-
Switching air-recirculation mode tronically ........................................ 286
on/off ................................................. 120 Function/notes ............................. 284
Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 69 General notes ................................ 284
T Restarting ...................................... 287
Warning lamp ................................. 226
Tailgate Warning message .......................... 286
Display message ............................ 213 Tires
Emergency unlocking ....................... 80 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 298
Important safety notes .................... 79 Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 296
16 Index
Bar (definition) ............................... 296 Summer tires ................................. 280

Changing a wheel .......................... 299 Temperature .................................. 292
Characteristics .............................. 296 TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Checking ........................................ 279 (definition) ..................................... 298
Curb weight (definition) ................. 298 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 298
Definition of terms ......................... 296 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 298
Direction of rotation ...................... 299 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 297
Display message ............................ 211 Tire size (data) ............................... 303
Distribution of the vehicle occu- Tire size designation, load-bearing
pants (definition) ............................ 299 capacity, speed rating .................... 293
DOT, Tire Identification Number Tire tread ....................................... 279
(TIN) ............................................... 295 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 298
DOT (Department of Transporta- Total load limit (definition) ............. 299
tion) (definition) ............................. 296 Traction ......................................... 292
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Traction (definition) ....................... 299
(definition) ..................................... 297 Tread wear ..................................... 292
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- Uniform Tire Quality Grading
inition) ........................................... 297 Standards ...................................... 291
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- Uniform Tire Quality Grading
ing) (definition) .............................. 297 Standards (definition) .................... 297
Important safety notes .................. 278 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 299
Increased vehicle weight due to Wheel rim (definition) .................... 297
optional equipment (definition) ...... 297 see Flat tire
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 297 Top Tether ............................................ 59
Labeling (overview) ........................ 293 Towing away
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 299 Important safety guidelines ........... 271
Load index ..................................... 295 Installing the towing eye ................ 272
Load index (definition) ................... 297 Removing the towing eye ............... 273
M+S tires ....................................... 280 With both axles on the ground ....... 273
Maximum loaded vehicle weight With the rear axle raised ................ 273
(definition) ..................................... 297 Tow-starting
Maximum load on a tire (defini- Installing the towing eye ................ 272
tion) ............................................... 298 Removing the towing eye ............... 273
Maximum permissible tire pres- Trailer hitch ......................................... 23
sure (definition) ............................. 298 Trailer tow hitch .................................. 23
Maximum tire load ......................... 291 Transmission
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 298 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 129
Optional equipment weight (defi- Display message ............................ 212
nition) ............................................ 298 Drive program ................................ 134
PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- Driving tips .................................... 131
inition) ........................................... 298 Engaging the drive position ............ 130
Replacing ....................................... 299 Engaging the park position ............ 129
Service life ..................................... 280 Holding the vehicle stationary on
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 298 uphill gradients .............................. 131
Speed rating (definition) ................ 297 Kickdown ....................................... 131
Storing ........................................... 300 Overview ........................................ 128
Structure and characteristics
(definition) ..................................... 296
Index 17
Program selector button ................ 131 Securing from rolling away ............ 300
Shifting to neutral .......................... 130 Starting .......................................... 127
Transmission position display ......... 129 Towing (front axle raised) .............. 273
Transmission position display Towing away .................................. 271
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 129 Tow-starting ................................... 271
Transmission positions .................... 130 Transporting .................................. 274
Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 79
tions) .................................................. 261 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 72
Trip computer (on-board com- Vehicle data ................................... 311
puter) .................................................. 177 Vehicle data ....................................... 311
Trip odometer Vehicle dimensions ........................... 311
Calling up ....................................... 176 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 79
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 177 Vehicle Homepage
see Trip odometer Data protection .............................. 143
Trunk Functions ....................................... 144
see Tailgate General information ....................... 143
Turn signals Internet connection ....................... 144
Changing bulbs (front) ................... 105 Vehicle identification number
Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 106 see VIN
Display message ............................ 204 Vehicle identification plate .............. 308
Switching on/off ........................... 100 Vehicle maintenance
Type identification plate see ASSYST PLUS
see Vehicle identification plate Vehicle tool kit .................................. 264
Video (DVD) ........................................ 181
U VIN ...................................................... 308
Unlocking
W
Emergency unlocking ....................... 79
From inside the vehicle (central Warning and indicator lamps
unlocking button) ............................. 78 ABS ................................................ 218
Brakes ........................................... 218
V Distance warning ........................... 225
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 236 ESP .............................................. 221
Vehicle ESP OFF ....................................... 222
Correct use ...................................... 25 Overview .......................................... 32
Data acquisition ............................... 26 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 41
Equipment ....................................... 20 RBS (Recuperative Brake Sys-
Individual settings .......................... 185 tem) ............................................... 218
Limited Warranty ............................. 25 Restraint system ............................ 224
Loading .......................................... 288 Seat belt ........................................ 216
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 79 Tire pressure monitor .................... 226
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 72 Warranty .............................................. 20
Lowering ........................................ 303 Washer fluid
Maintenance .................................... 21 Display message ............................ 214
Parking for a long period ................ 147 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 303
Raising ........................................... 300 Wheel chock ...................................... 300
Reporting problems ......................... 25
18 Index
Wheels Z
Changing a wheel .......................... 299
Checking ........................................ 279 ZONE function
Cleaning ......................................... 258 Switching on/off ........................... 118
Interchanging/changing ................ 299
Mounting a new wheel ................... 302
Mounting a wheel .......................... 300
Removing a wheel .......................... 302
Storing ........................................... 300
Tightening torque ........................... 303
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 303
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 201
Operation ......................................... 48
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 118
see Windshield
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 254
Notes ............................................. 310
Windshield wipers
Display message ............................ 214
Problem (malfunction) ................... 111
Rear window wiper ........................ 109
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 109
Switching on/off ........................... 108
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 152
Snow chains .................................. 280
Winter operation
General notes ................................ 280
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 280
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 259
Replacing (rear window) ................ 110
Replacing (windshield) ................... 109
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 261
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Introduction 19
Protection of the environment manner. Contact a qualified specialist work-

shop which has the necessary specialist
Note knowledge and tools to carry out the work
H Environmental note required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
for this purpose.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
Environmental concerns and recom-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
mendations
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account. When prompted to dispose of materials by
You too can help to protect the environment this Operator's Manual, always try to re-use
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- or recycle them first. Observe the relevant
tally responsible manner. environmental rules and regulations when
Energy consumption and the rate of engine, disposing of materials. In this way you will
transmission, brake and tire wear depend on help to protect the environment.
the following factors:
Roperating conditions of your vehicle Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Ryour personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should H Environmental note
bear the following in mind: Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
Operating conditions: assemblies and parts which are of the same
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures quality as new parts. They are covered by the
are correct. same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
parts.
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's energy con- ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
sumption. ces, as well as control units and sensors for
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need these restraint systems, may be installed in
them. the following areas of your vehicle:
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute Rdoors
to environmental protection. You should Rdoor pillars
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
Rdoor sills
Ralways have service work carried out at a
Rseats
qualified specialist workshop.
Rcockpit
Personal driving style:
Rinstrument cluster
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
Rcenter console
from the vehicle in front.
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and Do not install accessories such as audio
braking. systems in these areas. Do not carry out
repairs or welding. You could impair the
operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
H Environmental note
tems.
Have a defective high-voltage battery dis-
posed of in an environmentally-responsible Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
Z
20 Introduction
You could jeopardize the operating safety of The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels Booklet are important documents and should
as well as accessories relevant to safety be kept in the vehicle.
which have not been approved by Mercedes.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-
evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use Service and vehicle operation
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and Warranty
accessories that have been specifically The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies
approved for your vehicle. in accordance with the warranty terms and
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to conditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- mation Booklet.
cifically developed, manufactured or selected Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. exchange or repair any defective parts origi-
Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should nally installed in the vehicle in accordance
therefore be used. with the terms of the following warranties:
More than 300,000 different genuine RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for RState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon
Mercedes-Benz models.
Laws)
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-
Replacement parts and accessories are cov-
tain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-
for necessary service and repair work. In addi-
sories warranties. These are available at any
tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
ters provide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification num- i Should you lose your Service and War-
ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes- ranty Information booklet, have an author-
Benz parts (Y page 308). ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
replacement. The new Service and War-
ranty Information booklet will be mailed to
Operator's Manual you.
Vehicle equipment
This Operator's Manual describes all models Service and literature
and all standard and optional equipment of The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies
your vehicle available at the time of going to in accordance with the warranty terms and
print. Country-specific differences are possi- conditions in the Service and Warranty Book-
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not let. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
feature all functions described here. This also will exchange or repair any defective parts
applies to safety-relevant systems and func- originally installed in the vehicle in accord-
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may ance with the terms of the following warran-
therefore differ from that shown in the ties:
descriptions and illustrations.
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
RCalifornia,Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
tems installed in your vehicle.
setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
Introduction 21
Island and Vermont Emission Control Sys- tacting you in a timely manner should the
tems Warranty need arise.
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all lit-
laws) erature in the vehicle so that it is available to
the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send
Maintenance us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply
all the necessary maintenance work which call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
should be done at regular intervals. Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Always have the Service and Warranty Book-
Customer Service (Canada) at
let with you when you bring the vehicle to an
1-800-387-0100.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-
vice advisor will record every service for you
in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Vehicle operation outside Canada
When you are abroad with your vehicle,
Roadside Assistance observe the following points:
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Rservice facilities or replacement parts may
Program offers technical help in the event of a not be readily available.
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Some Mercedes-Benz models are available
Assistance Hotline are answered by our for delivery in Europe through our European
agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Delivery Program. For details, consult an
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to
(USA) one of the following addresses.
1-800-387-0100 (Canada) In the USA
For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- European Delivery Department
gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis- One Mercedes Drive
tance" section in the Service and Warranty
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Booklet (Canada). You will find both in the
vehicle document wallet. In Canada
European Delivery Department
Change of address or change of own- 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
ership Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
In the event of a change of address, please
send us the "Notification of Address Change"
in the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply Operating safety
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Important safety notes
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or G WARNING
Customer Service Center (Canada) at If you do not have the prescribed service/
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con- maintenance work or any required repairs
Z
22 Introduction
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or could be damaged without the damage
system failures. There is a risk of an accident. being visible. Components damaged in this
Always have the prescribed service/mainte- way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of
nance work as well as any required repairs an accident, no longer withstand the strain
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. they are designed to.
In such situations, have the vehicle
G WARNING checked and repaired immediately at a
If you switch off the ignition while driving, qualified specialist workshop. If on con-
safety-relevant functions are only available tinuing your journey you notice that driving
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, safety is impaired, pull over and stop the
for example, the power steering and the brake vehicle immediately, paying attention to
boosting effect. You will require considerably road and traffic conditions. In such cases,
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk visit a qualified specialist workshop.
of an accident.
Danger of electric shock
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
All of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys-
G WARNING tem components are marked with yellow
Modifications to electronic components, their warning stickers which warn you about high
software as well as wiring can impair their voltages. The cables of the vehicle's high-
function and/or the function of other net- voltage electrical system are orange.
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and elec-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
G DANGER
If you make changes to electronic compo-
The vehicle's high voltage electrical system is
nents, their software or wiring, the general
under high voltage. If you modify components
operating permit for your vehicle may be ren-
in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system
dered invalid.
or touch damaged components, you may be
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: electrocuted. The components in the vehi-
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high cle's high-voltage electrical system may be
curb or an unpaved road damaged in an accident, although the damage
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.
curb or a hole in the road Following an accident, do not touch any high-
Ra
voltage components and never modify the
heavy object strikes the undercarriage
vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have
or parts of the chassis
the vehicle towed away after an accident and
In situations like this, the body, the under- the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system
carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires checked by a qualified specialist workshop.
Introduction 23
When towing a vehicle after an accident, be The charging process is interrupted automat-
sure to observe the following sections: ically if:
RTransporting the vehicle (Y page 274) Ra serious electrical insulation malfunction
RTowing the vehicle with the front axle raised is detected in the vehicle's high-voltage
(Y page 273) electrical system.
RTowing a vehicle with both axles on the Ran electrical connection in the vehicle's
ground (Y page 273) high-voltage electrical system is discon-
Read the safety instructions on towing and nected.
tow-starting (Y page 271).
High-voltage switch-off device
The ignition must be switched off when car-
rying out general tasks, such as changing
bulbs or checking the coolant level.
Automatic switching off of the vehicle's

high-voltage electrical system
If the restraint systems are activated during
an accident, the vehicle's high-voltage elec-
trical system is automatically deactivated.
This is to ensure that you do not come into
contact with high voltage.
Your vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage
Automatic protection from switching switch-off device : which can be used to
on of the vehicle's high-voltage electri- switch off the vehicle's high-voltage electrical
cal system system.
The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is ! The high-voltage system must only be
not activated when the vehicle is started if: switched off at vehicle standstill by spe-
Ra serious electrical insulation malfunction cially trained service engineers. Otherwise
is detected in the vehicle's high-voltage the high-voltage system may be damaged.
electrical system.
Ran electrical connection in the vehicle's Mobile phone antenna
high-voltage electrical system is discon- ! It is not permitted to retrofit a mobile
nected. phone antenna.
Automatic switching off of the charging Trailer tow hitch

process
! Retrofitting a trailer tow hitch is not per-
The charging process is deactivated automat- missible.
ically if:
Rthe high-voltage battery is fully charged. Warning
Vehicles with an electric motor generate
much less driving noise than vehicles with
internal combustion engines. As a result,
when maneuvering or driving at low speeds
for example, your vehicle is not heard by other
Z
24 Introduction
road users until it is very close, or may not operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
even be heard at all. This is particularly the the operating safety of the vehicle could be
case if other road users have not yet seen affected. There is a risk of an accident.
your vehicle but are instead relying on hear- Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-
ing. Drive with particular care, allowing for the tics connection in the vehicle.
possibility that other road users may behave
unpredictably. G WARNING
The vehicle is equipped with a sound gener- Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
ator. At low speeds, an electric vehicle makes pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
less noise than a vehicle with a combustion The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
engine. The sound generator is activated so jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
that other road users can hear your vehicle
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
better. The sound generator is activated at
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
speeds of under 20 mph (30 km/h) and
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
switches off automatically at higher speeds.
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
Declarations of conformity
top of one another.
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves ! If equipment on the diagnostics connec-
tion is used, the starter battery may dis-
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle charge.
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-
ation is subject to the two following two con- The diagnostics connection is only intended
ditions: 1) These devices may not cause for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
harmful interference, and 2) These devices a qualified specialist workshop.
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause unde-
Routine checks and maintenance ser-
sired operation. Changes or modifications not
vice
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the users authority Bear in mind that you are legally obliged to
to operate the equipment." carry out daily checks and regular inspections
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle at your own responsibility. You can find fur-
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt ther information about the individual inspec-
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the tion steps in the Maintenance Booklet.
following two conditions: (1) These devices
may not cause interference, and (2) These
devices must accept any interference, includ- Qualified specialist workshop
ing interference that may cause undesired An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a
operation of the device." qualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-
essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-
fications to correctly carry out the work
Diagnostics connection required on your vehicle. This is especially the
G WARNING case for work relevant to safety.
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the let.
Introduction 25
Always have the following work carried out at 98 Vanderhoof Avenue

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Rwork relevant to safety
Rservice and maintenance work
Reporting safety defects
Rrepair work
Ralterations, installation work and modifica- USA only:
tions The following text is reproduced as required
Rwork on electronic components of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of
Rwork on the drive system
U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant
to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
Safety Act of 1966.
Correct use If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
If you remove any warning stickers, you or injury or death, you should immediately
others could fail to recognize certain dangers. inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Leave warning stickers in position. Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-
Observe the following information when driving Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
ing your vehicle: If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
Rthe safety notes in this manual open an investigation, and if it finds that a
Rthe Technical Data section in this manual safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
Rtraffic rules and regulations
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
individual problems between you, your
motor vehicles dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Problems with your vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
If you should experience a problem with your www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash-
affect its safe operation, we urge you to con- ington, DC 20590.
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You can also obtain other information about
immediately to have the problem diagnosed motor vehicle safety from
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
http://www.safercar.gov
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with the Mercedes-Benz Center or, if
necessary, contact us at one of the following
Limited Warranty
addresses.
In the USA ! Follow the instructions in this manual
Customer Assistance Center about the proper operation of your vehicle
as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Damage to your vehicle that arises from
One Mercedes Drive culpable contraventions against these
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 instructions is not covered either by the
In Canada Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the
Customer Relations Department New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Z
26 Introduction
Data stored in the vehicle Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal and
Data recording Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling
This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic This data can help provide a better under-
information relating to vehicle operation, mal- standing of the circumstances in which
functions, and user settings. This may include crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is
information about the performance or status recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
of various systems, including but not limited crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
to, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys- the EDR under normal driving conditions and
tems, that is stored and can be read out with no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
suitable devices, particularly when the vehi- and crash location) are recorded. However,
cle is serviced. The data obtained is used to other parties, such as law enforcement, can
properly diagnose and service your vehicle or combine the EDR data with the type of per-
to further optimize and develop vehicle func- sonal identification data routinely acquired
tions. during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
COMAND/mbrace cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
mbrace, additional data about the vehicles the special equipment, such as law enforce-
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain ment, can read the information by accessing
situations, and the location of the vehicle may the vehicle or the EDR.
be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace EDR data may be used in civil and criminal
system. matters as a tool in accident reconstruction,
For additional information please refer to the accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the
COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to
Terms and Conditions. extract data from the EDR is commercially
available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-
Event data recorders bility arising from the extraction of this infor-
mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-
This vehicle is equipped with an event data sonnel.
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
is to record data that will assist in under-
without the consent of the vehicle owners or,
standing how a vehicles systems performed
if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of
in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
the lessee. Exceptions to this representation
such as during air bag deployment or when
include responses to subpoenas by law
hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed
enforcement; by federal, state or local gov-
to record data related to vehicle dynamics
ernment; in connection with or arising out of
and safety systems for a short period of time,
litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries
typically 30 seconds or less.
and affiliates; or, as required by law.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
Warning: The EDR is a component of the Sup-
such data as:
plemental Restraint System ("SRS") Module.
Rhow various systems in your vehicle are Tampering with, altering, modifying or remov-
operating ing the EDR component may result in a mal-
Rwhether or not the driver and passenger function of the SRS Module and other sys-
seat belts are fastened tems.
Introduction 27
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that

conflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-
ted. This means that in the event of such con-
flict, the federal regulation governs. As of
February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws
relating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the fol-
lowing website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
Z
28
29
Cockpit ................................................. 30
Instrument cluster .............................. 31
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33
At a glance
Center console .................................... 34
Overhead control panel ...................... 36
Door control panel .............................. 37
30 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle D Climate control systems 114
shifters 131
E Ignition lock 127
; Combination switch 100
F Adjusts the steering wheel 92
= Instrument cluster 31
G Cruise control lever 152
? Horn
H Electric parking brake 145
A DIRECT SELECT lever 129
I Light switch 98
B PARKTRONIC warning dis-
play 155 J Diagnostics connection 24
C Overhead control panel 36 K Opens the hood 252

Instrument cluster 31
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
At a glance
: Speedometer A Display for the condition of
charge of the high-voltage
; Multifunction display 176 battery 174
= Power display 173 B Instrument cluster lighting 172
? E-CELL display 173
32 Instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

: L Low-beam head- F Seat belt 216
lamps 99
G RBS (Recuperative
; T Parking lamps 99 Brake System) 218
= K High-beam head- H R Rear fog lamp 99
lamps 100
I ; Drive system 207
? ESP 221
J h Tire pressure monitor 226
A ! Electric parking brake
K
(red) 223 High-voltage bat-
tery reserve 208
B ! Electric parking brake
(yellow) 223 L ESP OFF 221
C Distance warning 225 M ! ABS 218
D #! Turn signals 100 N $ Brakes 218
E 6 Restraint system 224
Multifunction steering wheel 33
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 176 A =;
; Audio/COMAND display Selects a menu 174
(see the separate operating 9:
instructions) Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 174
= ?
a
Switches on the Voice Con-
Confirms your selection 174
trol System (see the sepa-
rate operating instructions) Hides display messages 190
? ~ B %
Rejects or ends a call 181 Back 174
Exits phone book/redial Switches off the Voice Con-
memory trol System (see the sepa-
rate operating instructions)
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem-
ory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
34 Center console
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance
Function Page
: Audio system/COMAND; see the separate operating
instructions
; c Seat heating 91
= c PARKTRONIC 155
?
RANGE PLUS 136
A Hazard warning lamps 100
B 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 49
C Drive program 134
D & Immediate pre-entry climate control 122
Center console 35
Center console, lower section
At a glance
Function Page
: Ashtray 236
Cigarette lighter 236
Socket 237
Stowage compartment 228
; Stowage compartment 228
= Cup holder 234
? Stowage compartment 228
A Audio/COMAND controller; see the separate operating
instructions
36 Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel

At a glance

: u Switches the rear B Buttons for the garage door
compartment interior light- opener 248
ing on/off 102
C G SOS button (mbrace
; p Switches the right- system) 238
hand reading lamp on/off 101
D F Roadside Assistance
= | Switches the front call button (mbrace sys-
interior lighting/automatic tem) 240
interior lighting control off 102
E c Switches the front
? MB Info call button interior lighting on 102
(mbrace system) 240
F p Switches the left-
A Rear-view mirror 93 hand reading lamp on/off 101
Door control panel 37
Door control panel
At a glance
: Opens the door 77 A 7Z\ Adjusts the
exterior mirrors electrically 93
; % & Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 78 B W Opens and closes the
side windows 81
= r45= Saves
the seat and exterior mirror C n Activates/deacti-
settings 95 vates the override feature
for the rear power side win-
? Adjusts the seats electri- dows 62
cally 89
38
39
Useful information .............................. 40

Panic alarm .......................................... 40
Occupant safety .................................. 40
Children in the vehicle ........................ 56
Safety
Pets in the vehicle .............................. 62
Driving safety systems ....................... 62
Theft deterrent locking system ......... 69
40 Occupant safety
Useful information reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants

are subjected during an accident.
i This Operator's Manual describes all The restraint system comprises:
models and all standard and optional equip- RSeat belt system
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
RAir bags
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Safety
RChild restraint system

Country-specific differences are possible.
Bear in mind that your vehicle may not fea- RChild seat securing systems
ture all functions described here. This also The components of the restraint system work
applies to safety-relevant systems and in conjunction with each other. They can only
functions. deploy their protective function if, at all times,
all vehicle occupants:
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops: (Y page 24). Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 43)
Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint
Panic alarm properly (Y page 87).
As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the cor-
rect driver's seat position (Y page 86).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 46).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air
bag increases the level of protection for vehi-
cle occupants in the event of an accident. For
example, if, in the event of an accident, the
X To activate: press ! button : for at protection offered by the seat belt is suffi-
least one second. cient, the air bags are not deployed. When an
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting accident occurs, only the air bags that
flashes. increase protection in that particular accident
situation are deployed. However, seat belts
X To deactivate: press ! button :
and air bags generally do not protect against
again. objects penetrating the vehicle from the out-
or side.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Information on restraint system operation
can be found under "Triggering of the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device and air bags"
Occupant safety (Y page 54).
Restraint system: introduction For more information about children traveling
with you in the vehicle and on child restraint
The restraint system reduces the risk of vehi- systems, see "Children in the vehicle"
cle occupants coming into contact with parts (Y page 56).
of the vehicle's interior in the event of an
accident. The restraint system can also
Occupant safety 41
Important safety notes gered at all in the event of an accident with a

high rate of vehicle deceleration. This could
G WARNING affect Emergency Tensioning Devices or air
Modifications to the restraint system may bags, for example. The vehicle's high-voltage
cause it to no longer work as intended. The electrical system may also not be deactivated
restraint system may then not perform its as intended in the event of an accident. You
Safety
intended protective function and may fail in an could suffer an electric shock if you touch the
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. damaged components of the vehicle's high-
This poses an increased risk of injury or even voltage electrical system. This poses an
fatal injury. increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system. Have the restraint system checked and
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic repaired immediately at a qualified specialist
components or their software. workshop. Immediately switch off the ignition
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to and remove the SmartKey from the ignition
accommodate a person with disabilities, con- lock after an accident.
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details. USA only: for further information con-
tact our Customer Assistance Center at PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).
Restraint system warning lamp

The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on and
at regular intervals while the drive system is
running. Therefore, malfunctions can be
detected in good time.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up when the igni-
tion is switched on. It goes out no later than a PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp :
few seconds after the drive system is started. and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
The components of the restraint system are in lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classifica-
operational readiness. tion System (OCS).
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 The indicator lamps display the status of the
restraint system warning lamp: front-passenger front air bag.
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF : lights up: the
switched on front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with
ted. It will then not be deployed in the event
the drive system running of an accident.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON ; lights up: the
Rlights up again while the drive system is
running front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If,
in the event of an accident, all deployment
G DANGER criteria are met, the front-passenger front
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, indi- air bag is deployed.
vidual restraint system components may be
triggered unintentionally or might not be trig-
Z
42 Occupant safety
Depending on the person in the front- If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
passenger seat, the front-passenger front air quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
bag must either be disabled or enabled; see retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be
the following points. You must make sure of extracted any further.
this both before and during a journey. The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens
the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt
Safety
RChildren in a child restraint system:

whether the front-passenger front air bag is close against the body. However it does not
enabled or deactivated depends on the pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction
installed child restraint system, and the age of the backrest.
and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to The Emergency Tensioning Device does not
observe the notes on the "Occupant Clas- correct an incorrect seat position or the rout-
sification System (OCS)" (Y page 49) and ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 56). When triggered, seat belt force limiters help
There you will also find instructions on rear- to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on
ward and forward-facing child restraint sys- the vehicle occupant.
tems on the front-passenger seat. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats
RAll other persons: depending on the clas- are synchronized with the front air bags,
sification of the person in the front- which absorb part of the deceleration force.
passenger seat, the front-passenger front This can reduce the force exerted on the vehi-
air bag is enabled or deactivated cle occupants during an accident.
(Y page 49). Be sure to observe the notes
on "Seat belts (Y page 42) and "Air bags" ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,
(Y page 46). There you can also find infor- do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle
mation on the correct seat position. of the front-passenger seat. This may oth-
erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device in the event of an
Seat belts accident, which will then need to be
replaced.
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occu- The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
pants in the event of an accident or the vehi- tems is required by law in:
cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi- Rall 50 states
cle occupants coming into contact with parts
Rthe U.S. territories
of the vehicle interior or being ejected from
the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps Rthe District of Columbia
to keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi- Rall Canadian provinces
tion in relation to the air bag. Even where this is not required by law, all
The seat belt system comprises: vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
RSeat belts their seat belts before starting the journey.
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the G WARNING
front seat belts and the outer seat belts in If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-
the rear not protect as intended. Furthermore, an
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-
belts and the outer seat belts in the rear tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-
ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-
Occupant safety 43
tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or restraint system manufacturer's installa-
even fatal injury. tion instructions
Make sure that all vehicle occupants are Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
seated properly with a correctly fastened seat safety notes on the "Occupant classifica-
belt. tion system (OCS)" (Y page 49)
Safety
G WARNING
G WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their intended
The seat belt does not offer the intended level protective function if:
of protection if you have not moved the back-
Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could dirty, bleach or dyed
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This extremely dirty
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
injury. anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-
Adjust the seat properly before beginning fied
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
is in an almost vertical position and that the an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,
across the center of your shoulder. e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices could accidentally trigger or
G WARNING fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi- Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
tional suitable restraint system. If the seat sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia
belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas- undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
example, in an accident, during braking or an immediately at a qualified specialist work-
abrupt change of direction. This poses an shop.
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons under Only use seat belts that have been approved
5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any such
systems. modifications could invalidate the vehicle's
general operating permit.
If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft
(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Proper use of the seat belts
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz (Y page 42).
vehicle. The child restraint system must be All vehicle occupants must be wearing the
appropriate to the age, weight and size of seat belt correctly before beginning the jour-
the child ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu-
Ralways observe the instructions and safety pants are always wearing the seat belt cor-
notes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec- rectly while the vehicle is in motion.
tion of this Operator's Manual
(Y page 56) in addition to the child
Z
44 Occupant safety
When fastening the seat belt, always make Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
sure that:
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the (Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of
belt buckle belonging to that seat. seat belts (Y page 43).
Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. If the center rear seat belt is being used, also
Safety
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter observe the information about the seat belt
coat. for the center rear seat (Y page 45).
Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Only then can the forces which occur be
distributed over the area of the belt.
Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always
routed across the center of your shoulder.
The shoulder section of the belt must not
come into contact with your neck or be
routed under your arm. Where possible,
adjust the seat belt to the appropriate
height.
Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down
as possible across your lap.
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdo-
men. This applies particularly to pregnant
women. If necessary, push the lap belt X Adjust the seat (Y page 86).
down to your hip joint and pull it tight using The seat backrest must be in an almost
the shoulder section of the belt. vertical position.
Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet
pointed or fragile objects. =.
If you have such items located on or in your X Engage seat belt tongue ; in belt
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, buckle :.
store these in a suitable place.
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
time. across your body.
Infants and children must never travel sit-
ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the
event of an accident, they could be crushed
between the vehicle occupant and seat
belt.
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe
the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,
luggage or loads (Y page 228).
Occupant safety 45
The shoulder section of the seat belt must

always be routed across the center of the
shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.
The belt outlet will engage in various posi-
Safety
tions.
X To lower: hold belt outlet release : and
slide the belt outlet downwards.
X Let go of belt outlet release : in the
desired position and make sure that the
belt outlet engages.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
vehicle. Further information can be found
under "Special seat belt retractor" X Press release button :, hold belt
(Y page 57). tongue ; firmly and guide it back towards
belt outlet =.
Seat belt for the center rear seat
If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded Belt warning for the driver and front
down and back up again, the rear center seat passenger
belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
pulled out. ment cluster is a reminder that all occupants
X To release the rear center seat belt: pull must fasten their seat belts. It may light up
the seat belt out approximately 1 in continuously or flash. In addition, there may
(25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrest be a warning tone.
and then release it again. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt
The seat belt is retracted and released. has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp lights up for six seconds each
Releasing seat belts time the drive system is started. If the front
doors are closed and the driver or front-
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled passenger seat belt has not been fastened,
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up
will be trapped in the door or in the seat again after the six seconds. As soon as the
mechanism. This could damage the door, driver's and front-passenger seat belts are
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- fastened or a front door is opened again, the
aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out.
protective function and must be replaced. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after
Visit a qualified specialist workshop. the drive system is started, an additional
warning tone will sound. The warning tone
switches off after six seconds or once the
driver's seat belt is fastened.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a
Z
46 Occupant safety
warning tone sounds. The warning tone To avoid hazardous situations, always make
sounds with increasing intensity for sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
60 seconds or until the driver or front
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,
passenger have fastened their seat belts.
including pregnant women
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great-
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt
Safety
est possible distance to the air bags

warning is activated again.
Rfollow the following instructions
i For more information on the 7 seat Always make sure that there are no objects
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi- between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat pants.
belts" (Y page 216).
RAdjust the seats properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the
Air bags seat is in an almost upright position. The
Introduction center of the head restraint must support
the head at about eye level.
The installation point of an air bag can be rec- RMove the driver's and front-passenger
ognized by the AIR BAG symbol. seats as far back as possible. The driver's
An air bag complements the correctly fas- seat position must allow the vehicle to be
tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat driven safely.
belt. The air bag provides additional protec- ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-
tion in applicable accident situations. side. This allows the air bag to be fully
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. deployed.
The different air bag systems function inde- RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-
pendently from one another (Y page 54). ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against
However, no system available today can com- the door or side window. You may other-
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. wise be in the deployment area of the air
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury bags.
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in
which the air bag must be deployed. front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the
dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-
Important safety notes erwise be in the deployment area of the air
bag.
G WARNING RFor this reason, always secure persons less
If you do not sit in the correct seat position, than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint
the air bag cannot protect as intended and systems. Up to this height, the seat belt
could even cause additional injury when cannot be worn correctly.
deployed. This poses an increased risk of
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
injury or even fatal injury.
observe the following notes:
RAlways secure children under 12 years of
age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in
suitable child restraint systems.
RChild restraint systems should be installed
on the rear seats.
Occupant safety 47
ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing function of the sensors being impaired. The air
child restraint system on the front- bags might therefore not function properly
passenger seat when the front-passenger any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot
front air bag is deactivated. If the protect vehicle occupants as they are
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is designed to do. There is an increased risk of
permanently lit, the front-passenger front injury.
Safety
air bag is deactivated (Y page 41). Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
RAlways observe the instructions and safety Always have work on the doors or door pan-
notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys- eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
tem (OCS)" (Y page 49) and on "Children shop.
in the vehicle" (Y page 56) in addition to
the child restraint system manufacturer's Front air bags
installation instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-
vent the air bag from functioning cor-
rectly. Before starting your journey and to
avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air
bag as it deploys, make sure that:
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air
bag.
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar.
Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
the grab handles or coat hooks. steering wheel; front-passenger front air
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
attached to the vehicle within the deploy- box.
ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
windows, rear side trim or side walls. tional head and thorax protection for the
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects occupants in the front seats.
are in the pockets of your clothing. Store The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
such objects in a suitable place. PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps
inform you about the status of the front-
G WARNING passenger front air bag (Y page 41).
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
Front-passenger front air bag ; will only
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
deploy if:
function correctly. There is an increased risk
of injury. Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen-
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects sor readings, detects that the front-
to it. passenger seat is occupied (Y page 49).
The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
G WARNING lamp is lit (Y page 49)
Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per- high accident severity
formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
Z
48 Occupant safety
Driver's knee bag When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax and pelvis protection. How-
ever, it does not protect the:
Rhead
Rneck
Safety
Rarms
In the event of a side impact, the side impact
air bag is deployed on the side on which the
impact occurs.
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side (front) deploys in the follow-
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering situations:
ing column. The driver's knee bag is triggered Rthe OCS system detects that the front-
together with the front air bag. passenger seat is occupied or
The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh, Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt
knee and lower leg protection for the occu- buckle of the front-passenger seat
pant in the driver's seat. If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle, the side impact air bag on the front-
Side impact air bags passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci-
dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy-
G WARNING ment is independent of whether the front-
Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even passenger seat is occupied or not.
prevent the deployment of the air bags inte-
grated into the seats. Consequently, the air Window curtain air bags
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. In addition, the func-
tion of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) could be restricted. This poses an
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Window curtain air bags : are integrated

into the side of the roof frame and deployed in
the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or
arms.
In the event of a side impact, the window cur-
Side impact air bags : deploy next to the tain air bag is deployed on the side on which
outer bolsters of the seat backrests. the impact occurs.
Occupant safety 49
If the system determines that they can offer backrest of the forwards-facing child restraint
additional protection to that provided by the system must, as far as possible, be resting on
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be the backrest of the front-passenger seat.
deployed in other accident situations The child restraint system must not touch the
(Y page 54). roof or be put under strain by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-
Safety
rest and the head restraint position accord-
Occupant Classification System ingly.
(OCS) Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
Introduction correctly. Always observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) tions.
categorizes the person in the front-passenger
seat. Depending on that result, the front- Occupant Classification System opera-
passenger front air bag is either enabled or tion (OCS)
deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
Prerequisites
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly
: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Rin an almost upright position with their
back against the seat backrest ; PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi- The indicator lamps inform you whether the
ble front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
If the front passenger does not observe these enabled.
conditions, OCS may produce a false classi- X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
fication, e.g. because the front passenger: ignition lock.
Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- The system carries out self-diagnostics.
selves on a vehicle armrest The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps
from the seat cushion must light up simultaneously for approx-
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child imately six seconds.
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, The indicator lamps display the status of the
be sure to observe the correct positioning of front-passenger front air bag.
the child restraint system. Never place RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF : lights up: the
objects under or behind the child restraint front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
system, e.g. cushions. The entire base of the
child restraint system must always rest on the
seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The
Z
50 Occupant safety
ted. It will then not be deployed in the event and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
of an accident. lamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bag
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON ; lights up: the may deploy in an accident. The child could be
front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, struck by the air bag. This poses an increased
in the event of an accident, all deployment risk of injury or even fatal injury.
criteria are met, the front-passenger front
Safety
Make sure that the front-passenger front air

air bag is deployed. bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
If the status of the front-passenger front air BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an
air bag display message appears in the instru- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
ment cluster (Y page 203). When the front- lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR
passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten- BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and a rearward-facing child restraint system on
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamps. Be the front-passenger seat. You can find more
aware of the status of the front-passenger information on OCS under "Problems with the
front air bag both before and during the jour- Occupant Classification System"
ney. (Y page 53).
G WARNING G WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is restraint system on the front-passenger seat
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of and you position the front-passenger seat too
an accident and cannot perform its intended close to the dashboard, in the event of an
protective function. A person in the front- accident, the child could:
passenger seat could then, for example, come Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cially if the person is sitting too close to the cator lamp is lit, for example
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
injury or even fatal injury. AIR BAG ON is lit up
When the front-passenger seat is occupied, This poses an increased risk of injury or even
always ensure that: fatal injury.
Rthe classification of the person in the front- Move the front-passenger seat as far back as
passenger seat is correct and the front- possible. Always make sure that the shoulder
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle
bled in accordance with the person in the belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the
front-passenger seat child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved must be routed forwards and downwards
back as far back as possible. from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary,
Rthe person is seated correctly. adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-
Make sure, both before and during the jour- passenger seat accordingly. Always observe
ney, that the status of the front-passenger the child restraint system manufacturer's
front air bag is correct. installation instructions.
If OCS determines that:

G WARNING
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up after the system self-test and
Occupant safety 51
remains lit. This indicates that the front- When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6
passenger front air bag is deactivated. restraint system warning lamp in the instru-
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG
child of up to 12 months old in a standard OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the ted in this case and does not deploy during an
Safety
system self-test and remains lit. This indi- accident. Have the system checked by quali-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag fied technicians as soon as possible. Consult
is deactivated. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
But in the case of a 12-month-old child in a front-passenger seat should only be repaired
standard child restraint system, the at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up per- If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
manently after the system self-test. This the seat cushion is damaged, have the nec-
indicates that the front-passenger front air essary repair work carried out at an author-
bag is activated. The result of the classifi- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
cation is dependent on, among other fac- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
tors, the child restraint system and the mends that you only use seat accessories
child's stature. It is recommended that you that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
install the restraint system on a suitable If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
rear seat. mean that the front-passenger front air bag
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a will also deploy. The Occupant Classification
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the
or small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR front-passenger seat. Depending on that
BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- result, the front-passenger front air bag is
cator lamp lights up and remains lit after either enabled or deactivated.
the system self-test depending on the
result of the classification. System self-test
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp lights up, move the front-passenger G DANGER
seat as far back as possible. Alterna- If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
tively, a person of smaller stature can sit PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
on a rear seat. not light up during the system self-test, the
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
system is malfunctioning. The front-
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature passenger front air bag might be triggered
should not use the front-passenger seat. unintentionally or might not be triggered at all
in the event of an accident with high deceler-
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or
adult or a person of a stature correspond- even fatal injury.
ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG ON indicator lamp lights up after the In this case the front-passenger seat may not
system self-test and remains lit. This indi- be used. Do not install a child restraint system
cates that the front-passenger front air bag on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
is activated. pant Classification System (OCS) checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure cialist workshop.
to observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-
cle" (Y page 56).
Z
52 Occupant safety
G DANGER facing child restraint system must, as far as

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator possible, be resting on the backrest of the
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In lation instructions.
Safety
this case, the front-passenger front air bag

cannot perform its intended protective func- After the system self-test, the PASSENGER
tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front- AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON
passenger seat. indicator lamp display the status of the front-
passenger front air bag (Y page 49).
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially For more information about the OCS, see
if the person is sitting too close to the dash- "Problems with the Occupant Classification
board. This poses an increased risk of injury or System" (Y page 53).
even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
bled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-
rectly fastened seatbelt
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
passenger seat may not be used. Do not
install a child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
G WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
ation. This could result in the front-passenger
air bag not functioning as intended during an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-
Occupant safety 53
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 51).
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is
Safety
BAG OFF indicator incorrect.
lamp lights up and X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-
remains lit, even son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 49).
though the front- X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the
passenger seat is occu-
front-passenger seat may not be used.
pied by an adult or a
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
person of a stature cor-
responding to that of an Mercedes-Benz Center.
adult.
The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
lamp does not light up child seat.
and/or does not stay X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests
on.
on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of
The front-passenger the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as pos-
seat is: sible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If nec-
Runoccupied essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
Roccupied by the X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
weight of a child up seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-
to 12 months old in a passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and
child restraint sys- the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.
tem X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
the seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/
or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not
install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is
recommended that you install the restraint system on a suitable
rear seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
54 Occupant safety
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning people with asthma or other respiratory prob-

Devices and air bags lems. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of
the vehicle or open the windows as soon as it
Important safety notes is safe to do so.
G WARNING Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-
ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-
Safety
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
rial, which may require special handling and
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
regard for the environment. National guide-
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a lines must be observed during disposal. In
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
cialist workshop as soon as possible. HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
G WARNING
A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro- Method of operation
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
tection in an accident. There is an increased During the first stage of a collision, the
risk of injury. restraint system control unit evaluates impor-
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-
ist workshop in order to have a deployed air ation or acceleration, such as:
bag replaced. Rduration
Rdirection
It is important for your safety and that of your
Rintensity
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags Based on the evaluation of this data, the
repaired. This will help to make sure the air restraint system control unit deploys the
bags continue to perform their protective Emergency Tensioning Devices during a fron-
function for the vehicle occupants in the tal or rear collision.
event of a crash. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
deployed, if:
G WARNING
Rthe ignition is switched on
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
that have been deployed are no longer opera- Rthe components of the restraint system are
tional and are unable to perform their inten- operational; see "Restraint system warning
ded protective function. This poses an lamp" (Y page 41)
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- the respective front-passenger seat

sioning Devices which have been triggered The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the
immediately replaced at a qualified specialist rear compartment are deployed independ-
workshop. ently of the lock status of the seat belts.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices or air bags

are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small
amount of powder may also be released. The
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your
hearing. The powder that is released gener-
ally does not constitute a health hazard, but it
may cause short-term breathing difficulties in
Occupant safety 55
If the restraint system control unit detects a nor do they provide an indication of air bag
more severe accident, further components of deployment.
the restraint system are activated independ- The vehicle can be deformed considerably,
ently of each other in certain frontal collision without an air bag being deployed. This is the
situations: case if only parts which are relatively easily
deformed are affected and the rate of decel-
Safety
RFront air bags and driver's knee bag
RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter- eration is not high. Conversely, air bags may
mines that deployment can offer additional be deployed even though the vehicle suffers
protection to that provided by the seat belt only minor deformation. This is the case if, for
example, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-
The front-passenger front air bag is activated
gitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient
or deactivated depending on the person on
deceleration occurs as a result.
the front-passenger seat. The front-
passenger front air bag can only deploy in an If the restraint system control unit detects a
accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indi- side impact or that the vehicle is rolling over,
cator lamp is lit. Observe the information on the relevant restraint system components are
the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps activated independently of one another
(Y page 41). depending on the apparent type of accident.
If the system determines a need for additional
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags.
protection for the vehicle occupants, the
During the first deployment stage, the front
Emergency Tensioning Devices are deployed.
air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce
the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully RSide impact air bag on the side of impact,
deployed with the maximum amount of pro- independently of the Emergency Tension-
pellant gas if a second deployment threshold ing Device and the use of the seat belt on
is reached within a few milliseconds. the driver's seat
The deployment threshold of the Emergency The side impact air bag on the front-
Tensioning Devices and the air bag are deter- passenger side deploys under the following
mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel- conditions:
eration or acceleration which occurs at vari- - the OCS system detects that the front-
ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre- passenger seat is occupied or
emptive in nature. Deployment should take - the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
place in good time at the start of the collision. buckle of the front-passenger seat
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- RWindow curtain air bag on the side of
tion and the direction of the force are essen- impact, independently of the use of the
tially determined by: seat belt and independently of whether the
Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- front-passenger seat is occupied
sion RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and
Rthe collision angle front-passenger side in certain situations
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- when the vehicle rolls over, if the system
cle determines that deployment can offer addi-
tional protection to that provided by the
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
seat belt
the vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-
after a collision has occurred do not play a dent. The different air bag systems work
decisive role in the deployment of an air bag, independently of each other.
Z
56 Children in the vehicle
How the air bag system works is deter- the child restraint system manufacturer's
mined by the severity of the accident detec- installation instructions
ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
acceleration and the apparent type of acci- safety notes on the "Occupant classifica-
dent: tion system (OCS)" (Y page 49)
Safety
Rfrontal collision G WARNING

Rside impact If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
Rrollover they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Immediately after an accident, the following
measures are implemented, depending on Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
the type and severity of the impact: motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
Rshift the transmission out of park position P
Rthe emergency lighting is activated
Rstart the vehicle's drive system.
Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
Rthe front side windows are lowered There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Rthe drive system is deactivated When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer-
leave children or animals unattended in the
gency call
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Children in the vehicle
G WARNING
Important safety notes If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
Accident statistics show that children
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
secured in the rear seats are safer than chil-
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For
vehicle.
this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises
that you install a child restraint system on a
rear seat. Children are generally better pro- G WARNING
tected there. If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:
particularly on the metal parts of the child
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi- If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
cles. The child restraint system must be you, always ensure that the child restraint
appropriate to the age, weight and size of system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
the child tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and restraint system has been exposed to direct
safety notes in this section in addition to sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
Children in the vehicle 57
child in it. Never leave children unattended in Activating the special seat belt retractor:
the vehicle. X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have While the seat belt is retracting, you should
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit- hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
ting properly. Particular attention must be
Safety
belt retractor is activated.
paid to children.
X Push the child seat restraint system down
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt so that the seat belt is tight and does not
(Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of loosen.
seat belts (Y page 43).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve Removing a child restraint system/deactivat-
proper seat belt positioning for children over ing the special seat belt retractor:
41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a height X Always comply with the child restraint sys-
where a lap/shoulder belt can be fastened tem manufacturer's installation instruc-
properly without a booster seat. tions.
X Press the release button on the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back
Special seat belt retractor towards the belt outlet.
The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-
G WARNING
ted.
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
child restraint system will no longer be
secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
Child restraint system
tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
be immediately refastened. There is an tems is required by law in:
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Rall 50 states
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten- Rthe U.S. territories
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
Rthe District of Columbia
the special seat belt retractor and secure the
Rall Canadian provinces
child restraint system properly.
You can obtain further information about the
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are correct child restraint system from any
equipped with a special seat belt retractor. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
When activated, the special seat belt retrac-
tor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken G WARNING
once the child restraint system has been If the child restraint system is installed incor-
secured. rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
intended. The child cannot then be restrained
Installing a child restraint system:
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
X Always comply with the child restraint sys- sudden changes of direction. There is an
tem manufacturer's installation instruc- increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
tions. Make sure that you observe the child restraint
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt system manufacturer's installation instruc-
outlet. tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt that the base of the child restraint system is
buckle. always resting completely on the seat cush-
Z
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under i If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child
or behind the child restraint system. Only use on the front-passenger seat, be sure to
child restraint systems with the original cover observe the information on the "Occupant
designed for them. Only replace damaged Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 49).
covers with genuine covers. There you will also find information on
deactivating the front-passenger front air
Safety
G WARNING bag.
If the child restraint system is installed incor- All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in lowing standards:
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-
sudden change in direction. The child
ards 213 and 225
restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
risk of injury, possibly even fatal. 213 and 210.2
Always install child restraint systems prop- Confirmation that the child restraint system
erly, even if they are not being used. Make corresponds to the standards can be found
sure that you observe the child restraint sys- on an instruction label on the child restraint
tem manufacturer's installation instructions. system. This confirmation can also be found
in the installation instructions that are inclu-
You will find further information on stowing ded with the child restraint system.
objects, luggage or loads under "Loading Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
guidelines" (Y page 228). rior and on the child restraint system.
G WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing sys- LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-
tems which have been damaged or subjected ing system
to a load in an accident can no longer protect
as intended. The child cannot then be G WARNING
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
braking or sudden changes of direction. There do not offer sufficient protective effect for
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
fatal. (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt
Replace child restraint systems which have integrated in the child restraint system. In the
been damaged or subjected to a load in an event of an accident, a child might not be
accident as soon as possible. Have the secur- restrained correctly. This poses an increased
ing systems on the child restraint system risk of injury or even fatal injury.
checked at a qualified specialist workshop, If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
before you install a child restraint system only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
again. systems with which the child is also secured
with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the
Securing systems for the child restraint sys- child restraint system with the Top Tether
tem are: belt, if available.
Rthe seat belt system
Always comply with the manufacturer's
Rthe ISOFIX (LATCH-type) securing rings
installation and operating instructions for the
Rthe Top Tether anchorages
child restraint system used.
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH- Important safety notes
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is
engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO- G WARNING
FIX) securing rings If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in the event of an acci-
! When installing the child restraint system, dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
Safety
make sure that the seat belt for the middle direction. As a result, child restraint systems
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt cannot perform their intended protective
could otherwise be damaged. function. Rear seat backrests that are not
locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
in the event of an accident. This poses an
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-
ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-
fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-
ests so that they are in an upright position.
If the rear backrest is not engaged and

locked, the red lock verification indicator will
be visible (Y page 230).
: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child Top Tether anchorages
restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-
FIX) securing rings :.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
specially designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings : for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint systems are installed on the left and
right rear seats.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may
also be used and can be installed using the
vehicle's seat belt system. Install child seats
according to the manufacturer's instructions. The Top Tether anchorages are located on the
rear side of the rear seat backrests.
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between a child restraint system, secured
with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,
and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk of
injury even further. If the child restraint sys-
tem is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this
should always be used.
Z
X Move head restraint : upwards. that you install a child restraint system on a
X Release rear seat backrest = and fold it rear seat.
forwards (Y page 230). If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
X Route Top Tether belt B under head restraint system to the front-passenger seat,
restraint : between the two head restraint be sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system
Safety
bars.
X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt
(OCS)" (Y page 49).
B into Top Tether anchorage ?. You can thus avoid the risks that could arise
Make sure that: as a result of:
Ran incorrectly categorized person in the
RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage ? as shown. front-passenger seat
Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-
RTop Tether belt B is not twisted.
passenger front air bag
RTop Tether belt B is routed between rear
Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
seat backrest = and cargo compart-
ment cover ; if cargo compartment restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-
cover ; is installed. board
RTop Tether belt B is routed between the
Rearward-facing child restraint system
rear seat backrest = and the cargo net if
the cargo net is installed. If it is absolutely necessary to install a rear-
X Swing back rear seat backrest = until it ward-facing child restraint system on the
engages. front-passenger seat, always make sure that
The red lock verification indicator is no lon- the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
ger visible. ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 41)
restraint system with Top Tether. Always is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva-
comply with the child restraint system ted.
manufacturer's installation instructions Always observe the child restraint system
when doing so. manufacturer's installation and operating
X Tension Top Tether belt B. Always comply instructions.
with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so. Forward-facing child restraint system
X Move head restraint : back down again If it is absolutely necessary to install a
slightly if necessary (Y page 90). Make forward-facing child restraint system on the
sure that you do not interfere with the cor- front-passenger seat, always move the front-
rect routing of Top Tether belt B. passenger seat as far back as possible. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
Child restraint system on the front- passenger seat. The backrest of the child
passenger seat restraint system must, as far as possible, lie
flat against the backrest of the front-
General notes passenger seat. The child restraint system
Accident statistics show that children must not touch the roof or be put under strain
secured in the rear seats are safer than chil- by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the
dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For seat backrest and the head restraint position
this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises accordingly. Always make sure that the shoul-
der belt strap is correctly routed from the Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt motion if, for example, they:
guide on the child restraint system. The shoul-
der belt strap must be routed forwards and
downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide.
If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash Rstart the vehicle's drive system.
Safety
guide and the front-passenger seat accord- There is a risk of an accident and injury.
ingly. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Always observe the child restraint system SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
manufacturer's installation and operating leave children or animals unattended in the
instructions. vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Child-proof locks G WARNING

Important safety notes If persons, particularly children are subjected
G WARNING cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
could: vehicle.
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
G WARNING
or road users
If the child restraint system is subjected to
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
traffic
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
Roperate vehicle equipment and become particularly on the metal parts of the child
trapped restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
Always activate the child-proof locks and you, always ensure that the child restraint
override feature if children are traveling in the system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never restraint system has been exposed to direct
leave children unattended in the vehicle. sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
Override feature for: the vehicle.
RRear doors (Y page 62)
RRear side windows (Y page 62)
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Z
62 Driving safety systems
Child-proof locks for the rear doors Pets in the vehicle
G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
Safety
switches, for example.

As a result, they could:
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
endangering other road users
You secure each door individually with the Unsecured animals could also be flung around
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
opened from inside the vehicle. When the cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened and injury.
from the outside. Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
X To activate: press the child-proof lock cle. Always secure animals properly during
lever up in the direction of arrow :. the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
port box.
working properly.
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
Driving safety systems
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Overview of driving safety systems
Override feature for the rear side win- In this section, you will find information about
dows the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 63)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 63)
RRBS (Recuperative Brake System)
(Y page 68)
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (Adaptive
Brake Assist and distance warning signal)
(Y page 64)
RESP (Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 66)
X To activate/deactivate: press button :. REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
If indicator lamp is lit, operation of the rear (Y page 66)
side windows is disabled. Operation is only
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 68)
possible using the switches in the driver's
door. If the indicator lamp is off, operation RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 68)
is possible using the switches in the rear
compartment.
Driving safety systems 63
Important safety notes teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-

ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
If you fail to adapt your driving style or
tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
become distracted, the driving safety sys-
ding and accidents.
tems can neither reduce the risk of accident
nor override the laws of physics. Driving Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
Safety
safety systems are merely aids designed to diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
assist driving. You are responsible for the dis-
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed
including driving safety systems, will also
and for braking in good time. Always adapt
become inoperative. Observe the information
your driving style to suit the prevailing road,
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 218) and
weather and traffic conditions and maintain a
display messages which may be shown in the
safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive
instrument cluster (Y page 191).
carefully.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
i The driving safety systems described only (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-
work as effectively as possible when there tions. ABS works on slippery roads, even if
is adequate contact between the tires and you only brake gently.
the road surface. Pay particular attention to
the information regarding tires, recommen- Braking
ded minimum tire tread depths etc. in the
"Wheels and tires" section (Y page 278). X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
In wintry driving conditions, always use brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, uation is over.
snow chains. Only in this way will the driv- X To make a full brake application:
ing safety systems described in this section depress the brake pedal with full force.
work as effectively as possible. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-
General information tions as a reminder to take extra care while
driving.
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
This allows you to continue steering the vehi- BAS (Brake Assist System)
cle when braking.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument General information
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched BAS operates in emergency braking situa-
on. It goes out if the drive system is running. tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,
BAS automatically boosts the braking force,
Important safety notes thus shortening the stopping distance.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63). Important safety notes
G WARNING i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 63).
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking charac-
Z
G WARNING G WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance The distance warning function cannot always
in an emergency braking situation is clearly identify objects and complex traffic
increased. There is a risk of an accident. situations.
In an emergency braking situation, depress In such cases, the distance warning function
Safety
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents may:

the wheels from locking. Rgive an unnecessary warning
Rnot give a warning
Braking
There is a risk of an accident.
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
the emergency braking situation is over. uation and do not rely solely on the distance
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. warning function.
The brakes will function as usual once you
Function
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
tivate the distance warning function in the
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST on-board computer (Y page 184).
If the distance warning function is activated,
General notes
the multifunction display does not display a
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST comprises symbol.
Adaptive Brake Assist and the distance warn- When the distance warning function is deac-
ing signal, which are described in the follow- tivated, the symbol appears in the mul-
ing. tifunction display in the assistance graphics
display.
Distance warning function The distance warning function can help you to
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with
a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- a collision. If the distance warning function
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63). detects that there is a risk of a collision, you
G WARNING will be warned visually and acoustically. The
distance warning function cannot prevent a
The distance warning function does not react:
collision without your intervention.
Rto people or animals Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
Rto oncoming vehicles the distance warning function warns you if
Rto crossing traffic you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An
Rwhen cornering intermittent warning tone will then sound,
Thus, the distance warning function cannot and the distance warning lamp will light
provide a warning in all critical situations. up in the instrument cluster.
There is a risk of an accident. X Brake immediately in order to increase the
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- distance from the vehicle in front.
uation and be ready to brake. or
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
complicated but non-critical driving condi-
Rintervene unnecessarily
tions may also cause the system to display a
Rnot intervene
warning.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the There is a risk of an accident.
distance warning function can detect obsta- Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
Safety
cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
extended period of time. intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
Up to a speed of around 40 mph (70 km/h),
the distance warning function can also react G WARNING
to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
parked vehicles. Rto people or animals
If you approach an obstacle and the distance Rto oncoming vehicles
warning function detects a risk of a collision, Rto crossing traffic
the system will initially alert you both visually
Rto stationary obstacles
and acoustically.
Rwhen cornering
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if: As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
risk of an accident.
ing the sensors
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
uation and be ready to brake.
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for Due to the nature of the system, particularly
example in parking garages complicated but non-critical driving condi-
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-
motorbike vene.
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-
relative to the center of your vehicle tance in hazardous situations at speeds
above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
technology to assess the traffic situation.
cle, have the configuration and operation of
the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe- With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- distance warning signal can detect obstacles
sions at low speeds where there is no visible that are in the path of your vehicle for an
damage to the front of the vehicle. extended period of time.
As soon as a risk of a collision is detected,
Adaptive Brake Assist Adaptive Brake Assist calculates the braking
force necessary to avoid the collision. If you
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- apply the brakes forcefully, Adaptive Brake
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63). Assist will automatically increase the braking
G WARNING force to a level suitable for the traffic condi-
tions.
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa- X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
tions. emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Z
The brakes will work normally again if: Important safety notes
Ryou release the brake pedal. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63).
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in G WARNING
front of your vehicle.
Safety
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph risk of skidding and an accident.
(250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable You should therefore adapt your driving style
of reacting to moving objects that have to the different handling characteristics. Have
already been detected as such at least once the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
over the period of observation. Adaptive cialist workshop.
Brake Assist does not react to stationary
obstacles. Observe information regarding indicator and
If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to warning lamps (Y page 218) as well as dis-
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the play messages (Y page 195).
brake system remains available with full
brake boosting effect and BAS.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
be impaired if there is:
General notes
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Rthere is snow or heavy rain tion (Y page 63).
Rthere is interference by other radar sources ESP monitors driving stability and traction,
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for i.e. power transmission between the tires and
example in parking garages the road surface.
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a If ESP detects that the vehicle is deviating
motorbike from the direction desired by the driver, one
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the
relative to the center of your vehicle vehicle. The drive system output is also modi-
fied to keep the vehicle on the desired course
within physical limits. ESP assists the driver
when pulling away on wet or slippery roads.
the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- ESP can also stabilize the vehicle during
sions at slow speeds where there is no visible braking.
damage to the front of the vehicle.
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
EBD (electronic brake force distribution (Y page 63).
tion)
ETS traction control is part of ESP.
General information ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if
EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- they spin. This enables you to pull away and
sure on the rear wheels to improve driving accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example
stability while braking. if the road surface is slippery on one side. In
addition, more drive torque is transferred to If ESP intervenes:

the wheel or wheels with traction. X Do not deactivate ESP under any circum-
ETS remains active when you deactivate stances.
ESP. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
Safety
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
G WARNING ing road and weather conditions.
If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv- Deactivating/activating ESP
ing safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Important safety notes
Drive on carefully. Have ESPchecked at a i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
qualified specialist workshop. tion (Y page 63).
You can select between the following states
! When testing the electric parking brake of ESP:
on a braking dynamometer, switch off the
RESP is activated.
ignition. Application of the brakes by ESP
may otherwise destroy the brake system. RESP is deactivated.
When towing your vehicle with the front axle G WARNING
raised, observe the notes on ESP If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta-
(Y page 273). bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF of skidding and an accident.
warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri-
up continuously when the drive system is run- bed in the following.
ning.
If the ESP warning lamp and the It may be best to deactivate ESP in the fol-
ESP OFF warning lamp are lit continuously, lowing situations:
ESP is not available due to a malfunction. Rwhen using snow chains
Observe the information on warning lamps Rindeep snow
(Y page 221) and display messages which Ron sand or gravel
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 191). i Activate ESP as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP will
i Only use wheels with the recommended otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-
tire sizes. Only then will ESP function cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel
properly. starts to spin.
Characteristics of ESP ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an

extended period with ESP deactivated.
General information You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
If the ESP warning lamp goes out before
Deactivating/activating ESP
beginning the journey, ESP is automatically
active. You can deactivate or activate ESP via the
on-board computer.
If ESP intervenes, the ESP warning
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
Z
X To deactivate: (Y page 183). This steering assistance is provided in partic-

The ESP OFF warning lamp in the ular if:
instrument cluster lights up. Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on
X To activate: (Y page 183). a wet or slippery road surface when you
The ESP OFF warning lamp in the brake.
Safety
instrument cluster goes out. Rthe vehicle starts to skid.
Characteristics when ESP is deactivated Important safety notes

If ESP is deactivated and one or more wheels If ESP is malfunctioning, you will not receive
start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in steering support from STEER CONTROL.
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa- Power steering will, however, continue to
tions, ESP will not stabilize the vehicle. function.
If you deactivate ESP:
RESP no longer improves driving stability. RBS (Recuperative Brake System)
Rthe drive system's torque is no longer limi-
ted and the driven wheels are able to spin. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut- tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63).
ting action for better traction on loose sur- RBS converts the kinetic energy when braking
faces. into electrical current. The electric motor is
Rtraction control is still activated. used as an alternator during braking. The con-
RESP still provides support when you
verted energy is then stored in the high-volt-
age battery.
brake.
If the warning light in the instrument cluster is
ADAPTIVE BRAKE lit up, there is a motor malfunction or a brake
malfunction.
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
and offers increased braking comfort. In addi- G WARNING
tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE In the event of malfunctions in the RBS, the
also has the HOLD function (Y page 154) and following may occur:
hill start assist (Y page 128). For further Rthe braking performance of the electric
information, see "Driving tips" (Y page 148). motor may be either reduced or not effec-
tive
Rbrake pedal resistance may be lower than
STEER CONTROL usual
Rpedal travel may be longer than usual
General information
If you do not make an additional effort to apply
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a the brake yourself, the braking effect may not
noticeable steering force to the steering be sufficient. There is a risk of an accident.
wheel in the direction required for vehicle
In the event of this malfunction, continue to
stabilization.
depress the brake pedal. The brake system is
still fully functional.
Theft deterrent locking system 69
Theft deterrent locking system X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey.
Immobilizer
or
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
being started without the correct SmartKey.
A visual and an audible alarm are triggered if
Safety
X To activate: remove the SmartKey from the alarm system is armed and you open:
the ignition lock.
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
Ra door
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Rthe tailgate
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Any-
Rthe hood
one can start the drive system if a valid key
has been left inside the vehicle. X To stop the alarm: insert the SmartKey
into the ignition lock.
i The immobilizer is always deactivated The alarm is switched off.
when you start the drive system.
or
If the drive system cannot be started when
X Press the % or & button on the
the starter battery is fully charged, the
SmartKey.
immobilizer may be faulty. The READY dis-
The alarm is switched off.
play in the multifunction display does not
appear. Contact an authorized Mercedes- The alarm is not switched off, even if you
Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes close the open door that triggered it, for
(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can- example.
ada). i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call
system automatically sends a message to
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) the Customer Assistance Center by text
message or data connection. The emer-
gency call system sends the message pro-
vided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-
vice.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the Smart-

Key.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys-
tem is armed after approximately
15 seconds.
Z
70
71

SmartKey ............................................. 72
Doors .................................................... 77
Cargo compartment ............................ 79
Side windows ...................................... 81
Opening and closing

72 SmartKey
Useful information G WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the
i This Operator's Manual describes all SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
models and all standard and optional equip- tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
ment of your vehicle available at the time of cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
publication of the Operator's Manual. risk of an accident.
Country-specific differences are possible. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
Bear in mind that your vehicle may not fea- SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
Opening and closing
ture all functions described here. This also inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
applies to safety-relevant systems and
functions. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
i Read the information on qualified special- magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
ist workshops: (Y page 24). control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
SmartKey Do not keep the SmartKey:
Important safety notes Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another SmartKey
G WARNING Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, foil
they could:
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
Rget out and disrupt traffic. SmartKey functions
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of : & To lock the vehicle
reach of children. ; % To unlock the vehicle
X To unlock centrally: press button ;.
G WARNING
If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
If persons, particularly children are subjected
imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even Rthe vehicle is locked again.
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed
vehicle. again.
X To lock centrally: press button :.
SmartKey 73
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Mechanical key

Rthe doors General notes
Rthe tailgate
Rthe charge socket flap
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
and three times when locking. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
i You can also set an audible signal to con- system will be triggered (Y page 69).
Opening and closing

firm that the vehicle has been locked. The There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
audible signal can be activated and deacti-
vated using the on-board computer X Press the % or & button on the
(Y page 188). SmartKey.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Changing the settings of the locking
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
system
key, the charge socket flap will not be
You can change the settings of the locking unlocked automatically.
system. Then only the driver's door is X To unlock the charge socket flap: insert
unlocked when you unlock the vehicle. This is the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
useful if you frequently travel on your own.
XTo change the setting: simultaneously Removing the mechanical key
press the % and & buttons for
approximately 6 seconds until the battery
check lamp (Y page 74) flashes twice.
i If the setting of the locking system is
changed within the signal range of the vehi-
cle, pressing the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks
the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X To unlock the driver's door: press the
% button once. X Push release catch : in the direction of
X To unlock centrally: press the % but- the arrow and at the same time remove
ton twice. mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
X To lock centrally: press the & button. For further information about:
X To restore the factory settings: simulta-
Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 79)
neously press the % and & buttons Runlocking the cargo compartment
for approximately 6 seconds until the bat-
(Y page 80)
tery check lamp flashes twice
Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 79)
(Y page 74).
Z
74 SmartKey
SmartKey battery i If the SmartKey battery is checked within

the signal reception range of the vehicle,
Important safety notes pressing the & or % button:
G WARNING Rlocks or
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- Runlocks the vehicle
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
cialist workshop.
injury.
Opening and closing
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If Replacing the battery

a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately. You will need a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate Key (Y page 73).
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National
guidelines must be observed during disposal.
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Checking the battery

X Press mechanical key ; into the opening
in the SmartKey in the direction of the
arrow until battery tray cover : opens.
When doing so, do not hold cover : shut.
X Remove battery tray cover :.
X Press the & or % button.

The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X Change the battery (Y page 74). X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
to do so.
SmartKey 75
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is

free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover :
and then press to close it.
X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
Key.
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
Opening and closing
Z
76 SmartKey
Problems with the SmartKey

You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the SmartKey. function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the % or
Opening and closing
& button.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery and replace it if necessary
(Y page 74).
X Unlock (Y page 79) or lock (Y page 79) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the key at the driver's
door handle from close range and press the % / & button.
The SmartKey is faulty.

X Unlock (Y page 79) or lock (Y page 79) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-
Key. shop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors 77

The drive system can- The on-board voltage is too low.
not be started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
key. lighting, and try to start the drive system again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
Opening and closing

(Y page 265).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 269).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The drive system can- The steering lock is mechanically blocked.

not be started using the X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While
key. doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.
Doors cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even

fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
Important safety notes vehicle.
G WARNING
You should preferably place luggage or loads
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, in the cargo compartment. Observe the load-
they could: ing guidelines (Y page 228).
Rget out and disrupt traffic. Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
reach of children. X To unlock a front door: pull door han-
dle ;.
G WARNING Locking knob : pops up.
If persons, particularly children are subjected The door is unlocked and can be opened.
Z
78 Doors
X To open a front door: pull door handle ;. rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they
are secured by the child-proof lock
X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking
(Y page 62).
knob :.
The door is unlocked and can be opened. If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside
X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;. will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle Switch off the alarm (Y page 69).
even if it has been locked. You can open the If the vehicle has been locked using the lock-
Opening and closing
rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they ing button for the central locking, or has been
are secured by the child-proof lock locked automatically, and a door is opened
(Y page 62). from the inside:
If the vehicle has previously been locked with Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside previously been fully unlocked
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Ronly the door which has been opened form
Switch off the alarm (Y page 69). the inside is unlocked if only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside Automatic locking feature
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside. This can be useful if you wish
to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for
example.
X To deactivate: press and hold button :

for about 5 seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
about 5 seconds until a tone sounds.
X To unlock: press button :.
X To lock: press button ;. i If you press one of the two buttons and do
The vehicle locks when all the doors and not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
the tailgate are closed. already been selected.
This does not lock or unlock the charge The vehicle is locked automatically when the
socket flap. ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with You could therefore lock yourself out if:
the SmartKey. Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle Rthe vehicle is being towed.
even if it has been locked. You can open the Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
Cargo compartment 79
You can also switch the automatic locking X Check whether the locking knobs on the
function on and off using the on-board com- front-passenger door and the rear doors
puter (Y page 188). are still visible. Press down the locking
knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 77).
X Close the driver's door.
Unlocking the driver's door (mechan- X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
ical key) Key (Y page 73).
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
Opening and closing

the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. the driver's door as far as it will go.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 69).
Key (Y page 73).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as

it will go to position 1.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate
are locked.
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise Key.
as far as it will go to position 1.
The door is unlocked. i If you lock the vehicle as described above,
the charge socket flap is not locked. The
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
anti-theft alarm system is not armed.
it.
Key. Cargo compartment
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
G WARNING
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the If persons, particularly children are subjected
SmartKey, use the mechanical key. to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
X Open the driver's door. cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
doors and the tailgate. vehicle.
X Press the locking button (Y page 78).
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
Z
80 Cargo compartment
that there is sufficient clearance above and Closing

behind the tailgate.
i The opening dimensions of the tailgate
can be found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 311).
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the cargo compartment. Observe the load-
Opening and closing
ing guidelines (Y page 228).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com-
partment. You could otherwise lock yourself
out.
The tailgate can be: X Pull the tailgate down using handle :.
Ropened and closed manually from outside X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.
Runlocked from inside with the mechanical X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the &
key button on the SmartKey.
Opening/closing from outside Tailgate emergency release

Opening If the tailgate can no longer be opened from
X Press the % button on the SmartKey. outside the vehicle, use the emergency
release on the inside of the tailgate.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
i The opening dimensions of the tailgate
can be found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 311).
You can reach the emergency release via the
cargo compartment. Fold the rear backrests
forward (Y page 231).
X Pull handle :.
X Raise the tailgate.
Key (Y page 73).
Side windows 81
Side window reversing feature

The side windows are equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts a side window during the
closing process, the side window opens again
automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
Opening and closing

attention when closing a side window.
G WARNING
X Insert mechanical key ; fully into open- The reversing feature does not react:
ing : in the paneling.
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
X Turn mechanical key ; 90 clockwise.
gers
X Push mechanical key ; in the direction of
Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
the arrow and open the tailgate.
movement
i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 79), Rduring resetting
the cargo compartment is also locked. Rwhen closing the side window again man-
ually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
Side windows
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
Important safety notes uations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
G WARNING proximity during the closing procedure. If
While closing the side windows, body parts in someone becomes trapped, press the switch
the closing area could become trapped. There to open the side window again.
is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody Opening and closing the side win-
becomes trapped, release the switch or press dows
the switch to open the side window again.
The switches for all side windows are located
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
G WARNING
each door for the corresponding side window.
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are The switches on the driver's door take prec-
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. edence.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Z
82 Side windows
Convenience opening
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to
carry out the following functions simultane-
ously:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the side windows
Opening and closing
i The convenience opening feature can

only be operated using the SmartKey. The
: Front left SmartKey must be close to the driver's
; Front right door handle.
= Rear right X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
? Rear left door handle.
X Press and hold the % button until the
i When the override feature for the side
side windows are in the desired position.
windows is activated (Y page 62), the side
windows cannot be operated from the rear. X To interrupt convenience opening:
release the % button.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X To open: press the corresponding switch. Convenience closing feature
X To open fully: press the corresponding
switch beyond the point of resistance. G WARNING
Automatic operation is started. When using the convenience closing feature,
X To close: pull the corresponding switch. parts of the body could be trapped in the clos-
ing area when a side window is being closed.
X To close fully: pull the corresponding
There is a risk of injury.
switch beyond the pressure point. Auto-
Observe the complete closing procedure
matic operation is started.
when the convenience closing feature is oper-
X To interrupt automatic operation:
ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
press/pull the corresponding switch again. close proximity during the closing procedure.
i If you press/pull the switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-
started in the corresponding direction. You neously:
can stop automatic operation by pressing/ Rclose the side windows
pulling the switch again.
i The SmartKey must be close to the driv-
i You can continue to operate the side win- er's door handle.
dows after switching off the drive system or
removing the key. This function remains X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
active for 5 minutes or until the driver's or door handle.
front-passenger door is opened. X Press and hold the & button until the
side windows are fully closed.
Side windows 83
X Make sure that all the side windows are

closed.
X To interrupt convenience closing:
release the & button.
Resetting the side windows
Opening and closing

You must reset each side window if:
Rthe side window opens again slightly after
being closed fully.
Rthe side window can no longer be fully
opened or closed.
X Close all the doors.
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed (Y page 81).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side win-
dow is completely closed (Y page 81).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the respective side window remains
closed after the button is released, then it
has been set correctly. If this is not the
case, repeat the steps above again.
Z
84 Side windows
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
Opening and closing
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot X Remove the objects.
be closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
be closed and you can- slightly:
not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
85

Correct driver's seat position ............ 86
Seats .................................................... 87
Steering wheel .................................... 92
Mirrors ................................................. 93
Memory functions ............................... 95
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

86 Correct driver's seat position
Useful information X Make sure that seat = is adjusted prop-

erly.
i This Operator's Manual describes all Manual seat adjustment (Y page 88)
models and all standard and optional equip- Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 89)
ment of your vehicle available at the time of When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air
Bear in mind that your vehicle may not fea- bag as possible.
ture all functions described here. This also Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi-
applies to safety-relevant systems and tion.
functions. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.
Ryou have moved the backrest to an

ist workshops: (Y page 24). almost vertical position.
Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so
that your thighs are gently supported.
Correct driver's seat position Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-
G WARNING ted properly (Y page 89).
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do When doing so, make sure that you have
the following while driving: adjusted the head restraint so that the back
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, of your head is supported at eye level by the
steering wheel or mirrors center of the head restraint.
Rfasten the seat belt Observe the safety guidelines on steering
There is a risk of an accident. wheel adjustment (Y page 92).
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt ted properly.
before starting the engine. Adjusting the steering wheel
(Y page 92)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly.
Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 42).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 44).
Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjust-

ment (Y page 87).
Seats 87
The seat belt should: ment buttons and become trapped. There is a
Rfit snugly across your body risk of injury.
Rbe routed across the middle of your While moving the seats, make sure that your
shoulder hands or other body parts do not get under the
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-
hip joints tem.
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir-
G WARNING
ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 93) in
such a way that you have a good view of When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
road and traffic conditions. occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the

seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
X Vehicles with a memory function: save
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
the seat and exterior mirror settings
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
(Y page 95).
G WARNING
Seats The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
Important safety notes rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
G WARNING slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
Children could become trapped if they adjust abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
the seats, particularly when unattended. poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
There is a risk of injury. injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Adjust the seat properly before beginning
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
The seats can still be adjusted when there is across the center of your shoulder.
no SmartKey in the ignition lock.
G WARNING G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do If head restraints are not installed and adjus-
the following while driving: ted correctly, they cannot provide protection
as intended. There is an increased risk of
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
steering wheel or mirrors event of an accident or when braking.
Rfasten the seat belt
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
There is a risk of an accident. led. Before driving off, make sure for every
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- vehicle occupant that the center of the head
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt restraint supports the back of the head at
before starting the engine. about eye level.
G WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-
Z
88 Seats
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat Adjusting the seats manually
heating, observe the following information:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section.

Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
The seats should only be occupied by X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards
passengers, if possible. or backwards.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do X Release lever : again.
not cover the seats with insulating mate- Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov- position.
ers, child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the Backrest angle
footwell under or behind the seats when X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
moving the seats back. There is a risk that X Turn handwheel ? forwards or backwards.
the seats and/or the objects could be dam-
aged.
Seat height
i The head restraints in the front and rear
seats can be removed.1
X Pull handle = upwards or push it down
repeatedly until the seat has reached the
For more information, contact a qualified desired height.
i Further related subjects: Seat cushion angle
Rcargo compartment enlargement (fold- Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly
ing down the rear seats) (Y page 230) supported.
X Turn handwheel ; forwards or backwards.
1 Not on vehicles with sports seats or electrically adjustable head restraints.

Seats 89
Adjusting the seats electrically restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height

: Head restraint height2
; Seat cushion angle
= Seat height
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
A Backrest angle
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
i You can store the seat settings using the desired position.
memory function (Y page 95). X To lower: press release catch : in the
direction of the arrow and push the head
restraint down to the desired position.
Adjusting the head restraints
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the
G WARNING head restraint
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G WARNING
If head restraints are not installed and adjus-
ted correctly, they cannot provide protection
as intended. There is an increased risk of
injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
2 This function is only available on vehicles with electrically adjustable head restraints.
Z
90 Seats
With this function you can adjust the distance Removing and installing the rear seat
between the head restraint and the back of head restraints
the seat occupant's head. G WARNING
X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraint If head restraints are not installed and adjus-
forwards in the direction of the arrow until ted correctly, they cannot provide protection
it engages. as intended. There is an increased risk of
There are several notches. injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
X To move backwards: press and hold event of an accident or when braking.
release button : and push the head Always drive with the head restraints instal-
restraint backwards. led. Before driving off, make sure for every
X When the head restraint is in the desired vehicle occupant that the center of the head
position, release the button and make sure restraint supports the back of the head at
that the head restraint is engaged in posi- about eye level.
tion.
i Electrically adjustable head restraints
cannot be removed and re-installed.
Adjusting the height of the head
restraints electrically The rear head restraints on the outer seats
can be removed and re-installed.
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for head restraint adjustment
(Y page 89) up or down in the direction of
the arrow .
Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
X Fold the seat backrest slightly forwards in

order to remove the head restraint
(Y page 231).
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to
the stop.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the that the notches on the bar are on the left
desired position. when viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
X To lower: press release catch : and push
it engage in position.
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Seats 91
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
The system automatically switches from level
backrests individually to provide optimum
3 to level 2 after approximately
support for your back.
eight minutes.
The system automatically switches from level
2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.

ignition lock (Y page 127).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
: To raise the backrest contour
until all the indicator lamps go out.
; To soften the backrest contour
= To lower the backrest contour i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
? To harden the backrest contour heating may switch off.
Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating
G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high tempera-
tures may be affected or they may even suffer
burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
Z
92 Steering wheel
Problems with the seat heating

The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
switched off prema- sumers are switched on.
turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will
switch back on automatically.
Steering wheel Before starting off, make sure the steering

wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
Important safety notes wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
: Release lever
G WARNING ; To adjust the steering wheel height
Children could injure themselves if they = To adjust the steering wheel position
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of (fore-and-aft adjustment)
injury.
X Push release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
position.
X Push release lever : up completely.
Adjusting the steering wheel The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked.
G WARNING When doing so, try to push the steering
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the wheel up or down or try to move it in the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position fore-and-aft direction.
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Mirrors 93
Mirrors X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 127).
Rear-view mirror X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
mirror or button ; for the right-hand exte-
rior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button = as long

as the indicator lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button = up, down, or to
the left or right until you have adjusted the
exterior mirror to the correct position. You
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : should have a good overview of traffic con-
forwards or back. ditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
field of vision.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors are automatically heated
Adjusting the exterior mirrors after starting the vehicle if the rear window
defroster is switched on and the outside tem-
G WARNING perature is low. Heating takes a maximum of
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger 10 minutes.
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear. i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors
This means that you could misjudge the dis- manually by switching on the rear window
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g. defroster.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Exterior mirror pushed out of position
For this reason, always make sure of the If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
actual distance from the road users traveling position, proceed as follows:
behind by glancing over your shoulder. X Move the exterior mirror into the correct
position manually.
The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 93).
Automatic anti-glare mirrors

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
glare mode if:
Rthe ignition is switched on and
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the
sensor in the rear-view mirror.
Z
94 Mirrors
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if i If you shift the transmission to another
reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting position, the exterior mirror on the front-
is switched on. passenger side returns to the driving posi-
tion.
Parking position for the exterior mir- Using the memory button
ror on the front-passenger side You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
General notes the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
The "Parking position for the exterior mirror engage reverse gear. You can store this posi-
on the front-passenger side" function is only tion. This setting can be stored using memory
available if the vehicle is equipped with the button M ?.

"Memory package". X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
Setting and storing the parking position tion lock (Y page 127).
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
Using reverse gear
the front-passenger side.
You can position the front-passenger side
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
exterior mirror. You should see the rear
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.
engage reverse gear. You can store this posi-
tion. X Press memory button M ? and one of the
arrows on adjustment button = within
three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
the steps.
Calling up a stored parking position set-

ting
tion lock (Y page 127).
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side with the corresponding but-
tion lock (Y page 127). ton (Y page 93).
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
X Engage reverse gear.
the front-passenger side. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
X Engage reverse gear. side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position.
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
exterior mirror. You should see the rear
wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.
The parking position is stored.
Memory functions 95
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger With the memory function, you can store up
side moves back to its original position: to three different settings, e.g. for three dif-
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph ferent people.
(15 km/h) The following settings are stored as a single
Rabout ten seconds after you have disen- memory preset:
gaged reverse gear Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
Rif you press button : for the exterior mir- restraint

ror on the driver's side Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-
rors on the driver's and front-passenger
sides

Memory functions
Storing settings
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
X Adjust the seat (Y page 89).
G WARNING
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
side (Y page 93).
you and other vehicle occupants particularly
X Briefly press the M memory button and
children could become trapped. There is a
risk of injury. then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3
While the memory function is making adjust- within three seconds.
ments, make sure that no one has any body The settings are stored in the selected pre-
parts in the sweep of the seat. If somebody set position, and a confirmation tone
becomes trapped, immediately release the sounds.
memory function position button. The adjust-
ment process is stopped.
Calling up a stored setting
G WARNING X Press and hold the relevant storage posi-
Children could become trapped if they acti- tion button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and
vate the memory function, particularly when exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the i The setting procedure is interrupted as
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never soon as you release the storage position
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. button.
The memory function can be used at any time,

e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the igni-
tion lock.
Z
96
97

Exterior lighting .................................. 98
Interior lighting ................................. 101
Replacing bulbs ................................. 102
Windshield wipers ............................ 108
Lights and windshield wipers

98 Exterior lighting
Useful information Light switch

Operation
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip-
Bear in mind that your vehicle may not fea-
ture all functions described here. This also
functions.
ist workshops: (Y page 24).
1 W Left-hand standing lamps

2 X Right-hand standing lamps
Exterior lighting
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
General notes instrument cluster lighting
4 Automatic headlamp mode, control-
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
led by the light sensor
mends that you drive with the lights switched
on even during the daytime. In some coun- 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
tries, operation of the headlamps varies due B R Rear fog lamp
to legal requirements and self-imposed obli- If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
gations. vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
X Turn the light switch to .
Setting the exterior lighting The exterior lighting (except the parking/
standing lamps) switches off automatically if
Setting options you:
Exterior lighting can be set using: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Rthe light switch Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
Rthe combination switch (Y page 100) position 0 in the ignition lock.

Rthe on-board computer (Y page 187) Automatic headlamp mode
G WARNING
When the light switch is set to , the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
Exterior lighting 99
The automatic headlamp feature is only an not detect it is dark. This is a particularly use-
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's ful function in the event of rain and fog.
lighting at all times. X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
is the favored light switch setting. The turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
light setting is automatically selected accord- position 2 or switch on the ignition.
ing to the brightness of the ambient light X Turn the light switch to L.
(exception: poor visibility due to weather con- The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ditions such as fog, snow or spray): ment cluster lights up.
RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:
the parking lamps are switched on or off Rear fog lamp
automatically depending on the brightness The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
of the ambient light vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of
RWith the ignition on: if you have switched on thick fog. Please take note of the country-

the daytime running lamps function in the specific regulations for the use of rear fog
on-board computer, the daytime running lamps.
lamps or the parking lamps and low-beam X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
headlamps are switched on or off automat- SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2
ically depending on the brightness of the or switch on the ignition.
ambient light. X Turn the light switch to L or .
X To switch on automatic headlamp
X Press the R button.
mode: turn the light switch to . The yellow R indicator lamp in the
The daytime running lamps improve the visi- instrument cluster lights up.
bility of your vehicle during the day. The day- X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
time running lamps function is required by law R button.
in Canada. The yellow R indicator lamp in the
When the drive system is switched on and the instrument cluster goes out.
vehicle is stationary: if you move the DIRECT
SELECT lever to position P, the daytime run- i For vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps or
ning lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after the Intelligent Light System, if the rear fog
3 minutes. lamp is switched on, the lower 15 LEDs of
the brake lamp in the tail lamp switch off.
When the drive system is switched on, the
For right-wheel drive vehicles they only
vehicle is stationary and in high ambient light
switch off in the left-hand tail lamp, and for
brightness: if you turn the light switch
left-wheel drive vehicles only in the right-
to T, you turn on the daytime running
hand tail lamp. This is due to a legal require-
lamps and parking lamps.
ment.
If the drive system is switched on and you turn
the light switch to L, the manual settings Parking lamps
take precedence over the daytime running ! If the battery has been excessively dis-
lamps. charged, the parking lamps or standing
lamps are automatically switched off to
Low-beam headlamps
enable the next engine start. Always park
When the ignition is switched on and the light your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit
switch is in position L, the parking lamps according to legal standards. Avoid the
and low-beam headlamps are switched on. continuous use of the T parking lamps
This is the case even if the light sensor does for several hours. If possible, switch on the
X right or the W left standing lamp.
Z
100 Exterior lighting
X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. High-beam headlamps

The green T indicator lamp in the instru- X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
ment cluster lights up.
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
Standing lamps position 2 or switch on the ignition.
X Turn the light switch to L or .
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina- X Press the combination switch beyond the
ted. pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
X To switch on the standing lamps: the
In the position, the high-beam head-
lamps are only switched on when it is dark
SmartKey should not be in the ignition lock
and the ignition is on.
or it should be in position 0.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
headlamps are switched on.

the vehicle).
X To switch off the high-beam head-
lamps: move the combination switch back
Combination switch to its normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
Turn signal ment cluster goes out.
High-beam flasher
X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or switch on
the ignition.
X Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.
Hazard warning lamps

: High-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
= High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction
of arrow ; or ?.
Interior lighting 101
The hazard warning lamps automatically Interior lighting

switch on if:
Overview of interior lighting
Ran air bag is deployed or
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and
comes to a standstill.
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a
turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the corre-
sponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:

press button :. Front overhead control panel
The hazard warning lamps switch off auto- : p To switch the left-hand front reading
matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of lamp on/off
above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full ; c To switch the front interior lighting
brake application. on
= v To switch the on/off
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
the ignition is switched off. ? | To switch the front interior lighting/
automatic interior lighting control off
A p To switch the right-hand front read-
Headlamps fogged up on the inside ing lamp on/off
B To switch the automatic interior lighting
The headlamps may fog up on the inside if
control on
there is high atmospheric humidity.
X Switch on the lights and drive off.
The level of fogging diminishes, depending
on the length of the journey and the
weather conditions (humidity and temper-
ature).
If the level of fogging does not diminish:
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified
Rear-compartment overhead control panel (grab

handle in the rear compartment)
: To switch the reading lamp on/off
Z
102 Replacing bulbs
Interior lighting control Crash-responsive emergency lighting

Important notes The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
The interior lighting functions are automati-
X To switch off the crash-responsive
cally deactivated after some time except for
when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni- emergency lighting: press the hazard
tion lock. This prevents your vehicle's starter warning lamp button.
battery from discharging. or
The brightness of the ambient lighting may be X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
set using the on-board computer SmartKey.

(Y page 188). If the interior lighting control is
switched off, the ambient lighting is also
switched off. Replacing bulbs

Automatic interior lighting control
X To switch on: move the switch to center
Xenon bulbs
position B. G DANGER
X To switch off: move the switch to the | Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get
position. an electric shock if you remove the cover of
the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-
The interior lighting automatically switches
tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.
on if you:
Never touch the parts or the electrical con-
Runlock the vehicle tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on
Ropen a door the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock cialist workshop.
The interior light is activated for a short while
when the SmartKey is removed from the igni- You can recognize whether your vehicle is
tion lock. You can activate this delayed equipped with Xenon bulbs by the following:
switch-off using the on-board computer the cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves
(Y page 188). from the top to the bottom and back again
when you start the drive system. Before start-
Manual interior lighting control ing the drive system, you must first switch on
the lights.
X To switch the front interior lighting on: Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
set the switch to the c position. vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
X To switch off the interior lighting: set the that these function correctly at all times.
switch to the | position or (if the door is Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
closed) to the center position.
X To switch the on/off: press the u but- Other bulbs
ton.
G WARNING
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
press the p button.
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
Replacing bulbs 103
Allow these components to cool down before

changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if

its glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
Ryou touch it
Rit is hot
Ryou drop it
Ryou scratch it
Vehicles with halogen headlamps
Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps
: Turn signal lamp: 3457
designed for that purpose. Only install spare

bulbs of the same type and the specified volt- ; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
age. = Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W LL
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service ? Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube
with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the
glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and
rub it off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-
tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact
with liquids.
There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs
that you cannot replace. Replace only the
bulbs listed (Y page 103). Have the bulbs that
you cannot replace yourself changed at a
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps
: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W
If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
type can be found in the legend. : Tail lamp/turn signal lamp/brake lamp:
P 21 W
; Inoperative
= Side marker lamp: P 21 W
Z
104 Replacing bulbs
? Rear fog lamp: P 21 W

A Backup lamp: W 16 W
X To remove: switch off the lights.

X Turn the front wheels inwards.
Tail lamps (vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps) X Slide cover : upwards.

: Turn signal lamp/brake lamp: P 21 W Cover : is released.
; Rear fog lamp: H 21 W X Unclip cover :.
= Backup lamp: W 16 W X To install: clip in cover :.
X Push cover : down.
Cover : is locked.
Low-beam headlamps (halogen head-

lamps)
License plate lamp (vehicles with halogen head-

lamps)
: License plate lamp: C 5 W
Changing the front bulbs

X Remove the cover in the front wheel hous-
Removing and installing the cover in the ing (Y page 104).
front wheel housing
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
You must remove the cover from the front and remove it.
wheel housing before you can change the X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
front bulbs. pull out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
Replacing bulbs 105
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the X Switch off the lights.
right. X Open the hood.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel hous- X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
ing (Y page 104). and remove it.
X Pull out bulb holder ;.
High-beam headlamps/daytime run- X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
ning lamps (halogen headlamps) X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ;.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
Turn signals (halogen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.
X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Open the hood.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
pull out.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :.
right.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel hous-
X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise
ing (Y page 104).
until it engages.
Parking lamps/standing lamps (halo-
gen headlamps) Changing the rear bulbs
Opening and closing the side trim pan-
els
You must open the side trim panel in the
cargo compartment before you can change
the bulbs in the tail lamps.
Z
106 Replacing bulbs
Left-hand side trim panel X Press retaining lugs : simultaneously in

the direction of the arrow and pull the bulb
holder out.
Right-hand side trim panel

X To open: turn release knob : 90 in the
direction of the arrow and remove side trim Bulb holder
panel ;. : Turn signal/tail/brake lamps3.
X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn ; Unused bulbs (vehicles without LEDs)
release knob : 90 in the opposite direc- = Side marker lamp (vehicles without LEDs)
tion to the arrow.
X Lightly press the corresponding bulb into
the holder, turn it counter-clockwise and
Tail lamps remove it from the bulb holder.
Turn signal/tail and brake lamps X Insert the corresponding new bulb into the

bulb holder, press gently and turn it clock-
wise.
X Open the cargo compartment.
X Attach the bulb holder and press firmly.
X Open the side trim panel (Y page 105).
The retaining lugs on the bulb holder
engage audibly.
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 105).
3 Vehicles with LEDs: turn signal/brake lamps only

Replacing bulbs 107
Backup lamp and rear fog lamp

Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
backup lamp and rear fog lamp in the tailgate
changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Open the tailgate.
X Insert a screwdriver, for example, into
recess ? on the inside.
X Pry off and remove the upper section of
handle =.
X Pull the lower section of handle : using a X Remove bulb holder E using both sides of
sharp, sudden movement to remove it from lever F.

the trim and then place it to one side.
Bulb holder
X Reach under the right-hand side of trim B. X Rear fog lamp G: press the bulb gently
X Apply a gentle jolting force along the entire into holder E, turn it counter-clockwise
length of the trim in order to unclip it. and remove it from bulb holder E.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder E and
X Pull out connector C of the surround light-
ing by releasing the latches. turn it clockwise.
X Backup lamp H: remove the bulb from
X Place trim B to one side.
bulb holder E.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder E.
X Re-insert bulb holder E until you hear
engage audibly.
X Position trim D and engage it in place by
tapping it with your hand.
X Before beginning the installation, check
that all the metal clips are inserted in the
parts placed to one side: 2 clips ; in the
upper part of handle = and 5 clips A in
trim B.
X Unclip part of trim D from the assembly
using a sudden, sharp movement, until bulb
holder E is accessible.
Z
108 Windshield wipers
X If not, remove the missing metal clips from

the metal openings in the tailgate and
insert them in the appropriate places.
X Take trim B and connect plug connector
C to the surround lighting.
i The surround lighting only illuminates
when the tailgate has been shut and reop-
ened.
X Position trim B and engage it in place by
tapping it with your hand, starting from the
Combination switch
outside.
1 $ Windshield wiper off
X Clip in the lower section of handle : again.
2 Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

X Insert and engage the upper section of han-
set to low sensitivity)
dle = into lower section :.
3 Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
4 Continuous wipe, slow
Windshield wipers
5 Continuous wipe, fast
Switching the windshield wipers B Single wipe/ To wipe the wind-
on/off shield using washer fluid
! Do not operate the windshield wipers X Switch on the ignition.
when the windshield is dry, as this could X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust sponding position.
that has collected on the windshield can
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind-
the windshield is dry. shield becomes dirty in dry weather condi-
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield tions, the windshield wipers may be activa-
wipers in dry weather conditions, always ted inadvertently. This could then damage
use washer fluid when operating the wind- the windshield wiper blades or scratch the
shield wipers. windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
the windshield after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the or
other residues may be the reason for this. position, the appropriate wiping fre-
Clean the windshield using washer fluid quency is automatically set according to the
after washing the vehicle in an automatic intensity of the rain. In the position, the
car wash. rain sensor is more sensitive than in the
position, causing the windshield wiper to wipe
more frequently.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
will no longer be wiped properly. This could
prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
tions.
Windshield wipers 109
Switching the rear window wiper on/ Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
off wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear
window.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it
falls onto the windshield/rear window, the
windshield/rear window may be damaged
by the force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified

Combination switch Changing the windshield wiper blades
: Switch
2 To wipe with washer fluid
Removing the wiper blades
3 I To switch on intermittent wiping X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping
X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
5 To wipe with washer fluid
shield.
ignition lock.
X Turn switch : on the combination switch
to the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on,
the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
Replacing the wiper blades

G WARNING X Press both release clips ;.
If the windshield wipers begin to move while X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
you are changing the wiper blades, you could arrow = away from wiper arm ?.
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
injury. arrow A.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,

make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.
! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper
arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield/rear window.
Z
110 Windshield wipers
Installing the wiper blades X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the direction of the arrow until
it releases.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
Installing a wiper blade

X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to the
arrow until it engages.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated
X Position new wiper blade : with recess B correctly.
on lug A. X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper

X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arm :.
arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win-
clips ; engage in bracket ?. dow.
X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated
correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
shield.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.
X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win-
dow until it engages.
X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
Windshield wipers 111
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.

X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.

fluid from the spray X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-
nozzles no longer hits shop.
the center of the wind-
shield. The spray nozzles are dirty.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
X Clean the spray nozzles.
Z
112
113
Useful information ............................ 114

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 114
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 116
Setting the air vents ......................... 123
Climate control
114 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information lutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces

the amount of air supplied to the vehicle
i This Operator's Manual describes all interior. For this reason, you should always
models and all standard and optional equip- observe the interval for replacing the filter,
ment of your vehicle available at the time of which is specified in the Maintenance
publication of the Operator's Manual. Booklet. As it depends on environmental
Country-specific differences are possible. conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the
Bear in mind that your vehicle may not fea- interval may be shorter than stated in the
ture all functions described here. This also Maintenance Booklet.
applies to safety-relevant systems and i It is possible that the dehumidification
functions. function of the climate control system may
i Read the information on qualified special- be activated automatically an hour after the
ist workshops: (Y page 24). SmartKey has been removed. The vehicle is
then ventilated for 30 minutes.
Climate control
Overview of climate control systems

General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could other-
wise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Dual-zone automatic climate control dehu-
midifies the air and regulates the temperature
in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable
substances out of the air.
Optimum operation is only achieved with the
side windows closed.
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the con-
venience opening feature (Y page 82). This
will speed up the cooling process and the
desired vehicle interior temperature will be
reached more quickly.
i The integrated filter filters out most par-
ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-
ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-
Overview of climate control systems 115
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 117)
; To set climate control to automatic (Y page 117)
= To defrost the windshield (Y page 118)
? To increase the airflow (Y page 118)
A To set the air distribution (Y page 117)
B Display
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 120)
D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 116)
E To set the temperature, right (Y page 117)
F To activate/deactivate maximum cooling (Y page 119)
G To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 116)
H To reduce the airflow (Y page 118)
I To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 119)
J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 118)
Optimum use of dual-zone automatic ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
climate control tion briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
Automatic climate control ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
The following contains instructions and rec- if there are unpleasant outside odors or
ommendations to enable you to get the most when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
out of your automatic climate control. erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
RActivate climate control using the and into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
buttons. The indicator lamps in the RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-
and buttons light up. perature settings on the driver's side for
RSet the temperature to 72 (22 ). the front-passenger side as well. The indi-
cator lamp in the button goes out.
116 Operating the climate control systems
Operating the climate control sys- to drive. The air inside the vehicle is cooled
tems and dehumidified according to the tempera-
ture selected.
Switching climate control on/off Condensation may drip from the underside of
General notes the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-
When the climate control is switched off, the tion.
air supply and air circulation are also
switched off. The windows could fog up. Activating/deactivating
Therefore, switch off climate control only
briefly X To activate: press the button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights
Dual-zone automatic climate control up.
X To deactivate: press the button.
The indicator lamp in the button goes
tion lock.
out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"
Climate control
X To switch on: press the button. function has a delayed switch-off feature.
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
X Press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored.
X To switch off: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
i Dual-zone automatic climate control:
switch on climate control primarily using
the button.
Activating/deactivating cooling with

air dehumidification
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-
midification" function, the air inside the vehi-
cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-
cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-
dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only
deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi-
cation" function briefly.
The "Cooling with air-dehumidification" func-
tion is operational when the vehicle is ready
Operating the climate control systems 117
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
the button malfunction.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The "Cool-
ing with air dehumidifi-
cation" function cannot
be switched on.
Setting climate control to automatic X To switch to manual mode: press the

or button.
General notes or
Climate control
In automatic mode, the set temperature is X Press the K or I button.
maintained automatically at a constant level. The indicator lamp in the button goes
The system automatically regulates the tem- out. Automatic air distribution and airflow
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and are deactivated.
the air distribution.
The automatic mode functions optimally
when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" Setting the temperature
function is activated. If necessary, cooling
with air dehumidification can be deactivated. Dual-zone automatic climate control
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- Different temperatures can be set for the
midification" function, the air inside the vehi- driver's and front-passenger sides.
cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-
dows can fog up more quickly. Only switch
X To increase/reduce: turn thumbwheel :
the cooling with air dehumidification function
off for short periods. or E counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 115). Only change the temperature
Setting climate control to automatic setting in small increments. Start at 72
(22 ).
X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition
lock.
The READY indicator is displayed. Setting the air distribution
X Set the desired temperature.
Dual-zone automatic climate control
X To activate: press the button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights Air distribution settings
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow Directs air through the defroster vents
are activated.
P Directs air through the center and side
air vents
O Directs air through the footwell air
vents
b Directs the airflow through the center Defrosting the windshield

and side air vents as well as the
defroster vents You can use this function to defrost the wind-
shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-
a Directs air through the defroster and
shield and the side windows.
footwell vents
i The windshield heating is switched on
i Regardless of the air distribution setting, using the "Windshield defrosting" function.
airflow is always directed through the side
air vents. The side air vents can only be i Only use the "Windshield defrosting"
closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise function briefly until the windshield is clear
until they engage. again.
Setting the air distribution
The READY indicator is displayed.
X To activate: press the button.
X Press the or button repeatedly
Climate control
until the desired symbol appears in the dis- up.

play.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
Setting the airflow Rhigh
airflow
Rhigh
temperature
Dual-zone automatic climate control Rair distribution to the windshield and
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- front side windows
tion lock (Y page 127). Rair-recirculation mode off
X To increase/reduce: press the K or Rwindshield heating on
I button. i The "Windshield defrosting" function
automatically sets the blower output to the
optimum defrosting effect. As a result, the
Switching the ZONE function on/off airflow may increase or decrease automat-
This function is only available with dual-zone ically after the button is pressed.
automatic climate control. i You can adjust the blower output man-
X To activate: press the button. ually while the "Windshield defrosting"
The indicator lamp in the button lights function is in operation:
up. X Press the or button.
The temperature setting for the driver's X To deactivate: press the button.
side is not adopted for the front-passenger The indicator lamp in the button goes
side. out. The previously selected settings are
X To deactivate: press the button. restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
The indicator lamp in the button goes deactivated.
out. or
The temperature setting for the driver's X Press the button.
side is adopted for the front-passenger The indicator lamp in the button goes
side. out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or Rear window defroster

X Turn temperature control : or E counter-
clockwise or clockwise (Y page 115). General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
MAX COOL maximum cooling soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
the rear window defroster switches off auto-
The MAX COOL function is only available in
matically after several minutes.
vehicles for the USA.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-
The MAX COOL function only works when the
dow defroster may switch off.
vehicle is ready to drive.
Activating/deactivating
The READY indicator is displayed. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X To activate: press the button. tion lock (Y page 127).
X Press the button.
Climate control
The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
X To activate: press the button again.
The indicator lamp goes out. The previously up or goes out.
selected settings are restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate con-
trol switches to the following functions:
Rmaximum cooling
Rmaximum airflow
Rair-recirculation mode on
Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside
Dual-zone automatic climate control
X Activate the "Cooling with air dehu-
midification" function.
X Activate automatic mode .
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the "Windshield defrosting" function.
i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside

XActivate the windshield wipers.
XSet the air distribution to P or O.
i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
Problems with the rear window defroster

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
ted prematurely or can- lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
defroster can be activated again.
Activating/deactivating air-recircula- i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-

tion mode matically:
Rafter approximately 5 minutes at outside
General notes
temperatures below approximately 41
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if (5 )
Climate control
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle Rafter approximately 5 minutes if the cool-
from outside. The air already inside the vehi- ing with air dehumidification function is
cle will then be recirculated. deactivated
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out-
windows can fog up more quickly, in particu- side temperatures above approximately
lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu- 41 (5 ) if the "Cooling with air dehu-
lation mode briefly to prevent the windows midification" function is activated
from fogging up.
Activating/deactivating Convenience opening/closing using

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- the air-recirculation button
tion lock. G WARNING
X To activate: press the e button. When using the convenience closing feature,
The indicator lamp in the e button lights parts of the body could be trapped in the clos-
up. ing area when a side window is being closed.
i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto-
matically at high outside temperatures. Observe the complete closing procedure
When air-recirculation mode is activated when the convenience closing feature is oper-
automatically, the indicator lamp in the ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
e button is not lit. close proximity during the closing procedure.
Outside air is added after about
G WARNING
30 minutes.
During convenience opening parts of the body
X To deactivate: press the e button. could be drawn in or become trapped
The indicator lamp in the e button goes between the side window and window frame.
out. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
dow during the opening procedure. If some-
one becomes trapped, press the W switch
immediately to open/close the side window The high-voltage battery must be sufficiently
in the door. The side window stops. To con- charged before the pre-entry climate control
tinue closing the side window, pull on the (via key) can be activated.
W switch. Activating/deactivating the pre-entry cli-
mate control (via key)
X Convenience closing feature: press and When the vehicle is unlocked using the Smart-
hold the e button until the side win- Key, the climate control functions are activa-
dows are closed. ted.
The indicator lamp in the e button lights
up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. i You can activate pre-entry climate control
(via the SmartKey) three times in succes-
If parts of the body are in the closing area sion. The climate control function will be
during convenience closing, proceed as fol- deactivated after the third time. The Pre-
lows: Entry Climate Ctrl. (Via SmartKey)
X Press the W button for opening/closing Available Again After Engine Start
the side windows. display message appears in the instrument
Climate control
The side window stops. cluster. To activate the pre-entry climate
X To then open the side windows, press the control again, start the drive system.
W button again. The pre-cooling climate control function runs
or for up to 1 minute, the pre-heating climate
X Press and hold the e button again for control function runs for up to 5 minutes.
longer than 2 seconds. When the vehicle is pre-cooled, the following
The side windows move in the opposite functions are activated as necessary:
direction. RClimate control system
i Notes on the automatic reversing feature RCooling with air dehumidification
for the side windows (Y page 81).
RBlower
X Convenience opening feature: press and
When the vehicle is pre-heated, the following
hold the e button until the side win- functions are activated as necessary:
dows are opened. The side windows move
RClimate control system
back to their original positions.
The indicator lamp in the e button goes RBlower
out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. RSeat heating
RWindshield heating
i If you open the side windows manually
after closing them with the convenience RRear window defroster
closing feature, they will remain in this posi- Pre-entry climate control is automatically
tion when opened using the convenience switched off when operational readiness
opening feature. mode is requested.
Activating/deactivating pre-entry cli-
mate control (via SmartKey)
Pre-entry climate control via key You can activate and deactivate pre-entry cli-
Before getting in, the vehicle interior can be mate control (via SmartKey) via the on-board
briefly warmed or ventilated in advance and computer in the ECELL submenu
the air from the air vents can be pre-cooled. (Y page 185).
i If the condition of charge of the high-volt-
age battery is below the specified minimum
Z
condition of charge, pre-entry climate con- RSeat heating

trol will not be activated even if it has been RWindshield heating
set. RRear window defroster
"Immediate pre-entry climate control" is auto-
Pre-entry climate control at departure matically switched off when operational read-
time and immediate pre-entry climate iness mode is requested.
control
Setting the departure time
You can set a departure time for the "pre-
G WARNING entry climate control at departure time". Your
If persons, particularly children are subjected vehicle will then be cooled or heated until the
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or desired temperature is reached in time for the
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even set departure time. "Pre-entry climate control
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the at departure time" will be activated a maxi-
mum of 50 minutes before departure. If the
Climate control
vehicle.
departure is delayed, the vehicle will be
heated or cooled for a further 5 minutes.
General notes
You can set the desired departure time in the
Using the "pre-entry climate control at depar- ECELL submenu on the on-board computer
ture time" function, you can cool or heat the (Y page 185).
vehicle interior prior to the desired departure
time. Activating immediate pre-entry climate
When using the "pre-entry climate control at control
departure time" function, the condition of
You can activate "immediate pre-entry cli-
charge of the high-voltage battery must be
mate control" even if the vehicle interior is
higher than the specified minimum condition
already at the desired temperature. This
of charge.
means that the vehicle interior continues to
The running time of the climate control may be cooled or heated, e.g. if the journey is
be reduced if: interrupted for up to 50 minutes, and the inte-
Rthe vehicle is not connected to an electric rior temperature is kept constant. You can
power supply only set the desired temperature using the
Rthe high-voltage battery is not fully charged climate control unit. If you do not pre-select a
temperature, the last temperature set will be
In certain situations, the desired interior tem-
automatically adopted.
perature cannot be reached.
When the vehicle is cooled, the following
functions are activated as necessary:
RCooling with air dehumidification
RBlower
When the vehicle is heated, the following
functions are activated as necessary:
RBlower
Setting the air vents 123
The colors of the indicator lamps in the button Setting the center air vents
have the following meanings:
Red Heating activated
Blue Cooling activated
Yellow Pre-entry climate control at depar-
ture is preselected
X To activate/deactivate "immediate pre-
entry climate control": press button :
on the center console (Y page 34).
The blue or red indicator lamp in the button
lights up or goes out.
X To open the center air vents: turn the
adjuster in one of center air vents : coun-
Setting the air vents ter-clockwise.
Climate control
Important safety notes X To close the center air vents: turn the
adjuster in one of center air vents : clock-
G WARNING wise until it engages.
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There Setting the side air vents
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield
and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,
snow or leaves. : Side window defroster vent
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles ; Side air vent
in the vehicle interior. X To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster
i You can move the adjusters for the air in the side air vent ; to the left.
vents vertically or horizontally to set the X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster
direction of the airflow. in the side air vent ; to the right until it
i For optimal climate control in the vehicle, engages.
open the air vents completely and set the
adjusters to the central position.
Z
124
125

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
............................................................. 126
Driving ............................................... 126
Driving and parking

Transmission ..................................... 128
Charging the high-voltage battery .. 134
Parking ............................................... 144
Driving tips ........................................ 147
Driving systems ................................ 152
126 Driving

Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
i This Operator's Manual describes all of the pedals, e.g.:
Rshoes with thick soles
Driving and parking
Rshoes with high heels

Country-specific differences are possible. Rslippers
Bear in mind that your vehicle may not fea- There is a risk of an accident.
ture all functions described here. This also Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
applies to safety-relevant systems and usage of the pedals.
functions.
i Read the information on qualified special- G WARNING
ist workshops: (Y page 24). If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
Important safety notes more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
New and replaced brake pads and discs only of an accident.
reach their optimum braking effect after sev- Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-
sate for this by applying greater force to the G WARNING
brake pedal. If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
Roverheat and cause a fire
Driving
Rlose its hold function.
Important safety notes There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off.
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the The braking performance of the electric
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. motor using recuperative braking is, in some
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is operating modes, either reduced or not effec-
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. tive:
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are Rwhen the condition of charge of the high-
voltage battery increases
Rif the high-voltage battery is not yet at a
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use normal operating temperature
loose floormats and do not place floormats on Rwhen driving at speeds close to zero
top of one another. Rin transmission position N
Rduring and after ESP stability control.
If necessary, counteract the reduced regen-
erative braking effect by applying the brake
yourself.
Driving 127
! Make sure the charging cable has been Starting the engine
disconnected from the vehicle socket
before starting a journey. The vehicle or Important safety notes
charging cable may otherwise be damaged
G WARNING
when you drive off.
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
Driving and parking

i Before commencing your journey, ensure they could:
that the charging cable required for charg-
ing the high-voltage battery is in the vehi-
cle.
SmartKey positions Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
reach of children.
g To remove the SmartKey
(shift the transmission to position P) Vehicles with an electric motor generate
much less driving noise than vehicles with
1 Power supply for some consumers, such
internal combustion engines. As a result, your
as the windshield wipers
vehicle may not be heard by other road users
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) in certain situations. This can happen, for
and drive position example, when you are parking and your vehi-
3 Starting the engine cle is not seen by other road users. This
i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni- requires you to adopt a particularly anticipa-
tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart- tory driving style, as it is necessary to allow
Key for the vehicle. The ignition is not for the possibility that other road users may
switched on. The drive system cannot be behave erratically.
started. The vehicle is equipped with a sound gener-
ator. The sound generator is activated so that
other road users can hear your vehicle better.
The sound generator is activated at speeds of
under 20 mph (30 km/h) and switches off
automatically at higher speeds.
Starting procedure
i Do not switch the ignition on and off at
intervals of less than 3 seconds more than
15 times in succession. If it is switched on
Z
128 Transmission
and off more than 16 times, the ignition i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
must remain off for at least 20 seconds. pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
You could otherwise damage the vehicle. drop down.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 You can open the doors from the inside at
(Y page 127) in the ignition lock and release any time.
Driving and parking
it.
The drive system is started. The system
check display appears in the multifunction Hill start assist
display. Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away
Once the system check is complete, the on a hill. It holds the vehicle for a short time
Ready display appears in the lower multi- after you have removed your foot from the
function display. The vehicle is ready to brake pedal. This gives you enough time to
drive. move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal and depress it before the
vehicle begins to roll.
Pulling away
G WARNING
The vehicle is equipped with a sound gener- After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ator. At low speeds, an electric vehicle makes ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
less noise than a vehicle with a combustion There is a risk of an accident and injury.
engine. The sound generator is activated so Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
that other road users can hear your vehicle brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
better. The sound generator is activated at leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
speeds of under 20 mph (30 km/h) and assist.
switches off automatically at higher speeds.
i It is only possible to move the DIRECT X Take your foot off the brake pedal.
SELECT lever from position P to the desired The vehicle is then held for about a second.
selector lever position if you depress the X Pull away.
brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock Hill start assist is not active if:
deactivated, at which point the electrical
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a
parking brake is released automatically. If
downhill gradient.
the brake pedal is not depressed, the
Rthe DIRECT SELECT lever is in position N.
DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but
the parking lock remains engaged. Rthe electric parking brake is applied.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it RESP is malfunctioning.
depressed. Further information on holding the vehicle

X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to position stationary on uphill gradients (Y page 131).
D or R.
X Release the brake pedal.
Transmission
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
The electric parking brake is automatically Important safety notes
released (Y page 145).
i Shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada P when the drive system is switched off and
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
the vehicle is stationary. Park position P is
ter goes out.
Transmission 129
engaged and the electric parking brake is

applied automatically:
If the DIRECT SELECT lever cannot be
engaged in park position P, the parking
brake is engaged automatically.
Driving and parking

Observe the "Important safety notes" section
on activating/deactivating ESP : Transmission position display
(Y page 183). ; Drive program display
i The arrows in the transmission position
DIRECT SELECT lever display show how and into which transmis-
sion positions you can shift using the
Overview of transmission positions DIRECT SELECT lever.
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the ! If the transmission position display in the
steering column. multifunction display is not working, you
should pull away carefully to check whether
the desired transmission position is
engaged. it is advisable to select transmis-
sion position D.
Engaging park position P

i You can only engage park position P when
the vehicle is stationary.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc-
tion of arrow P.
j Park position with parking lock Transmission position display P is shown in
k Reverse gear the multifunction display.
i Neutral
h Drive
i When you have engaged park position P,
make sure that the transmission position
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns display shows P in the multifunction dis-
to its original position. The current trans- play.
mission position P, R, N or D appears in the
transmission position display (Y page 176) i The transmission shifts into park position
in the multifunction display. P automatically if you open the driver's
door when the vehicle is stationary or when
Transmission position display driving at very low speed with the trans-
mission in position D or R.
The current transmission position and drive In addition, a warning tone sounds and a
program appear in the multifunction display. display message is shown.
i Depressing the brake and pushing the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disen-
gages the parking lock. The transmission is
in N neutral.
Z
130 Transmission
In order to shift from park position P When leaving the vehicle, always take the
directly into R or D: SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Rdepress the brake pedal and leave children or animals unattended in the
Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or
reach of children.
down past the first point of resistance
Driving and parking
RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.

Engaging reverse gear R RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
! Only shift into reverse gear R when the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
vehicle is stationary. You could otherwise RShift to neutral N.
damage the drive system. RRelease the brake pedal.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,
brake pedal. release it.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
first point of resistance. Key in the ignition lock.
Shifting to neutral N Engaging drive position D

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal. brake pedal.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
to the first point of resistance. the first point of resistance.
When the drive system is switched off, the
transmission shifts to N automatically.
Transmission positions
Remaining in neutral N
If the transmission is to remain in neutral N, B Park position
for example when washing the vehicle in an This prevents the vehicle from roll-
automatic car wash with a towing mecha- ing away when stopped. Only move
nism, observe the following information: the selector lever to P when the
vehicle is stationary.
G WARNING
The SmartKey can only be removed
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, when the selector lever is in posi-
they could: tion P. When there is no SmartKey
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other in the ignition lock, the selector
people or road users. lever is locked in position P.
C Reverse gear
Only move the selector lever to R
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in when the vehicle is stationary.
Transmission 131
A Neutral move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down

past the point of resistance.
No power is transmitted from the
drive system to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you Program selector button
to move the vehicle freely.
Driving and parking

If ESP is faulty: only move the General notes
selector lever to N if the vehicle is The program selector button allows you to
in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy choose between drive programs with differ-
roads. ent driving characteristics.
7 Drive
For driving forwards
Driving tips
Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients
Do not hold the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients by depressing the accelerator
pedal. Instead, only ever hold the vehicle sta- Program selector button
tionary on uphill gradients by:
Rdepressing the brake pedal E Economy Comfortable, economical
driving style
Rengaging the electric parking brake
S Sport Sporty driving style
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Press program selector button :.
The selected drive program appears in the
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the multifunction display.
pressure point.
The needle in the power display points to When the ignition is switched on, the driving
the boost area (Y page 173). mode last selected becomes active.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
Steering wheel paddle shifters
i Maximum acceleration is available for a
limited time. Manually adjustable recuperation
If necessary, counteract the reduced regen-
Rocking the vehicle free erative braking effect by applying the brake
Shifting the transmission repeatedly between yourself.
gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if it You can increase or reduce recuperation in
has become stuck in slush or snow. The vehi- overrun mode using the steering wheel pad-
cle's engine management system limits the dle shifters. When you remove your foot from
speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when the accelerator pedal, recuperation occurs.
shifting back and forth. To shift back and forth The electric motor is then used as a alternator
between transmission positions D and R, and energy is recovered while driving. The
Z
132 Transmission
recuperated electrical energy is stored in the The various different levels are to be used
high-voltage battery. A higher energy recu- under the following conditions:
peration level means that the vehicle is
braked more powerfully. D+ Driving without much braking
and without the presence of
The various recuperation levels are shown in
obstacles or sharp bends
Driving and parking
the transmission position display once D has

been selected (Y page 129). The vehicle retains the maxi-
mum possible amount of kinetic
The following recuperation levels are availa-
energy.
ble in overrun mode:
Rno recuperation (D+, coasting mode) D Normal driving (standard set-
ting)
Rmoderate recuperation (D)
Rhigh recuperation (D-) D- Sporty driving
Rrecuperation depending on the traffic sit- The brake pedal does not need
uation (DAUTO, radar-based) to be used as often because the
extent of the deceleration is
You can see the intensity of recuperation in
greater than in D.
overrun mode by reading the recuperation
performance value shown in the power dis- Energy use when decelerating is
play (Y page 173). considerably higher than when
the vehicle is braked with the
The transmission shifts into recuperation
brake pedal.
level DAUTO each time the ignition is switched
on. DAUTO The intensity of recuperation is
(radar- automatically adjusted to the
based) current traffic situation.
In levels D and D-, deceleration can be con-

trolled in an infinitely variable manner using
the accelerator pedal.
The braking performance of the electric
motor using recuperative braking is, in some
operating modes, either reduced or not effec-
tive:
: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter - Rwhen the condition of charge of the high-
; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter voltage battery increases
+ Rif the high-voltage battery is not yet at a
X To reduce recuperation: pull right-hand normal operating temperature

steering wheel paddle shifter ; towards Rwhen the vehicle is almost stationary
you. Rin transmission position N
X To increase recuperation: pull left-hand Rduring and after ESP stability control
steering wheel paddle shifter : towards
you. Radar-based recuperation
i Radar-based recuperation is not a dis-
tance control function and therefore can-
Transmission 133
not maintain the distance to the vehicle in If you change between radar-based and man-
front. ual recuperation, the following levels are acti-
Maintain a safe distance. vated depending on the steering wheel pad-
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you acti- dle shifter selected:
vate COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST as a ; Steering selects D+ (overrun)
Driving and parking

visual and acoustic aid. wheel paddle
The vehicle uses the sensors of COLLISION shifter +
PREVENTION ASSIST during radar-based
: Steering selects D- (maximum
recuperation (DAUTO). The sensors detect the
wheel paddle recuperation)
distance to the vehicle ahead and its speed.
shifter -
The intensity of recuperation is then auto-
matically adjusted to the current traffic sit-
uation. In particular, the function of the radar sensors
The range can then be increased by storing can be impaired in the case of:
energy efficiently. Adjustment is infinitely var- Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
iable from overrun mode (no recuperation) to covering the sensors
maximum recuperation. Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Examples of radar-based recuperation: Rthere is interference by other radar sources
RApproaching a slower vehicle, a decelerat- Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
ing vehicle or when following a vehicle example in parking garages
downhill. Your vehicle decelerates slightly Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
and increases recuperation. motorbike
RDriving when no vehicle is detected in front
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
or when a vehicle is detected in the far dis- relative to the center of your vehicle
tance or an accelerating vehicle is detec-
ted. Your vehicle switches to overrun mode
at higher speeds.
the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-
RDriving on a steep downhill slope. Acceler-
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
ation downhill is reduced and recuperation sions at slow speeds where there is no visible
is increased. This is comparable with shift- damage to the front of the vehicle.
ing down when driving downhill.
X To activate radar-based recuperation:
i If the radar sensor is not available, the
system switches automatically to level D
pull one steering wheel paddle shifter :
or ; towards you and hold for with moderate recuperation. In this case
about one second. have the radar sensor checked at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
X To deactivate radar-based recupera-
tion: briefly pull one steering wheel paddle
Automatic adjustment of recuperation
shifter : or ; towards you. on downhill gradients
i Automatic adjustment of recuperation on
downhill gradients is available in level
DAUTO or on vehicles without steering wheel
paddle shifters in level D.
The vehicle can detect steep downhill gradi-
ents. To reduce acceleration downhill and to
Z
134 Charging the high-voltage battery
charge the high-voltage battery, recuperation G WARNING

is increased steplessly. This is comparable to In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-
the engine brake in a combustion engine sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed a
when you downshift a gear on a downhill gra- critical value. In this case flammable gas
dient. escapes through a ventilation valve on the
Driving and parking
underbody. The gas can ignite. There is a risk

of injury.
Drive program
Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure
Drive program E is characterized by the fol- the danger area at a suitable distance, whilst
lowing: observing legal requirements.
Rfull power output by using kickdown.
Rthe
G DANGER
vehicle pulling away more gently in
forward gear unless the accelerator pedal If you use incorrectly installed mains sockets
is depressed fully. or adapters, extension cables or similar to
connect the charging cable to a mains socket,
Rreduced power on the accelerator pedal
this could lead to fires or an electric shock.
increases sensitivity. This supports an even
There is a risk of fatal injury.
and economical driving style.
To avoid hazardous situations, observe the
Rthe wheels are less likely to spin.
following:
Drive program S is characterized by the fol-
ROnly connect the charging cable to mains
lowing:
sockets that:
Rthe entire power output can be utilized by - are installed correctly and
depressing the accelerator pedal.
- have been approved by an electrical spe-
cialist.
Charging the high-voltage battery RFor safety reasons, only use the charging
cables supplied with the vehicle, or charg-
Important safety notes ing cables which have been approved for
use with this vehicle.
G DANGER
RNever use a damaged charging cable.
The vehicle's high voltage electrical system is
RDo not use:
under high voltage. If you modify components
in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system - Extension cables
or touch damaged components, you may be - Cable drums
electrocuted. The components in the vehi- - Multiple sockets
cle's high-voltage electrical system may be
RDo not use a socket adapter to connect the
damaged in an accident, although the damage
charging cable to the mains socket. The
is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.
only exception is if the adapter has been
Following an accident, do not touch any high- tested and approved by the manufacturer
voltage components and never modify the for charging the high-voltage battery in an
vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have electric vehicle.
the vehicle towed away after an accident and
RAlways observe the safety notes in the
the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system
socket adapter's operating instructions.
checked by a qualified specialist workshop.
Charging the high-voltage battery 135
The vehicle's high voltage electrical system is cluster. Charge the high-voltage battery as
under high voltage. soon as possible.
RDo not handle high-voltage components or Below a condition of charge of 5%, the per-
the orange cables of the vehicle's high-volt- formance of the vehicle is reduced.
age electrical system. The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system
Driving and parking

RDo not touch high-voltage components or switches off at a condition of charge of 0%.
the orange cables of the high-voltage elec- i Use of the pre-entry climate control (via
trical system when a vehicle has been key) may mean that the high-voltage bat-
involved in a crash. tery is not fully charged.
RDo not touch any damaged components or
the damaged orange cables of the vehicle's Discharged battery
high-voltage electrical system.
RDo not remove the covers of the high-volt-
The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system
switches off if the high-voltage battery is com-
age electrical system components that are
pletely discharged. 30 seconds prior to this,
marked with a warning sticker.
you are informed of the switch-off by the
Battery level too low. Stop and
General notes charge immediately message. This pro-
tects the battery from exhaustive discharge.
Method of operation
i It is not possible to restart the drive sys-
The vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage tem until after charging.
battery for driving. The high-voltage battery Do not leave the vehicle parked for longer
stores the energy needed to operate the elec- than 14 days with a high-voltage battery con-
tric motor and releases it again. dition of charge below 20%.
The electric motor uses energy that has been You can check the condition of charge in the
stored in the high-voltage battery when pull- charge level display (Y page 174).
ing away, accelerating and during the jour-
Further information on the "Energy flow dis-
ney.
play" can be found in the "Trip" menu
In overrun mode, kinetic energy is converted (Y page 176).
by means of energy recuperation into electri-
cal energy and stored in the high-voltage bat- High and low outside temperatures
tery.
The high-voltage battery can be charged as Low outside temperatures
follows: The efficiency of the high-voltage battery is
Rthrough
significantly reduced at very low outside tem-
energy recuperation while the
peratures. The high-voltage battery is then no
vehicle is in motion
longer able to provide the normal electrical
Rwith the charging cable at a mains socket
power output.
while the vehicle is stationary
High outside temperatures
Rwith the charging cable at a charging sta-
To prevent damage to the high-voltage bat-
tion while the vehicle is stationary
tery due to very high outside temperatures,
The high-voltage battery can be charged in a the maximum power output of the high-volt-
voltage range from 110 V to 240 V. age battery is reduced automatically.
i If the condition of charge drops to less The E-CELL display indicates the maximum
than 13%, the high-voltage battery reserve amount of power available (Y page 173).
indicator lamp lights up in the instrument
Z
Energy consumption and range If you activate RANGE PLUS, the operating
window of the battery will be extended at the
This range is reduced by:
next charging process. An extended driving
Rhigh and low outside temperatures range will be available to you for the next
Rthe use of air conditioning or heating journey.
Driving and parking
Rswitching on consumers
i The more often RANGE PLUS is used, the
The battery's physical characteristics are more the extended range is reduced.
such that leaving the vehicle parked for an Therefore always check the range display
extended period at low outdoor temperatures before every journey.
without charging it can lead to:
Ra reduction in battery performance
Rlonger charge times
In extreme cases, this could mean that the
vehicle cannot be started. For this reason,
connect the charging cable when leaving the
vehicle parked for long periods at low outdoor
temperatures.
As a result of its basic characteristics, the
amount of energy available from the high-
voltage battery decreases over the course of
its life. X To switch on: press button :.
The green Indicator lamp lights up.
This reduces:
X To switch off: press button :.
Rthe maximum range that can be achieved The indicator lamp goes out.
by the vehicle
Rthe maximum output (acceleration) of the
RANGE PLUS switches off automatically if:
vehicle Rthe charging cable is disconnected or
You can actively reduce the energy consump- Rthe charging process is complete
tion of your vehicle in a number of ways, for
example, by: Notes on battery care
Ran anticipatory driving style Avoid storing or transporting the vehicle in
Rreducing the use of electrical consumers high temperatures over a long period (e.g.
Rhaving the vehicle regularly maintained container transport).
The charging time of the high-voltage battery If you park the vehicle and leave it stationary
may change over the course of its life. for longer periods, connect it to a power sup-
ply.
RANGE PLUS Temperatures below 13 (25 ) and over
104 (40 ), which affect the vehicle for a
i Using RANGE PLUS shortens the service period of more than seven days, can cause
life of the battery. Therefore, only use irreversible damage.
RANGE PLUS if, for example:
Rlong journeys are planned or
Rthe availability of charging stations at the
destination is limited
Conditions of use Should the permissible heating temperature

limits be exceeded, have the mains power
Observe the following notes:
supply checked.
Rinformation on exceptions to the high-volt-
age battery terms of use in the battery Protection device against overvoltage
rental agreement
Driving and parking

Rinformation on exceptions and limitations
! Overvoltage in the mains supply may
in warranty documentation and in the rela- damage the vehicle. For this reason, the
ted Maintenance Booklet vehicle is equipped with a protection device
against overvoltage in the mains supply.
Rmaintenance notes for the high-voltage
This device may be triggered during severe
battery in the Maintenance Booklet thunderstorms, for example, and may lead
to the building's fuse being tripped and an
Handling the charging cable and charg- interruption in the power supply. These
ing cable controls functions protect the vehicle. After the
Do not leave the charging cable controls building fuse is switched on again, the
(Y page 138) hanging loose from an electrical charging process resumes automatically.
outlet. Otherwise, this could result in a poor Following an interruption in the power sup-
contact with the electrical outlet and mal- ply or tripping of the building's fuse, it may
functions when charging the vehicle. take up to 10 minutes for charging to
To ensure that the brackets within the charg- resume automatically.
ing cable controls are not subjected to incor- Switch on the building protection system
rect loads, observe the following: again after it has been triggered. Otherwise,
RNever lift or carry the controls by the charg-
the charging process cannot be continued.
ing cable connector or the mains plug. The high-voltage battery will not be charged
and you may not be able to drive the vehicle.
RTo transport the charging cable, the coiled
part can be: If other devices are protected by the same
protective device, these are switched off as
- wrapped around the controls or
well when the protective device is triggered.
- secured to the housing of the controls
Ensure that these other devices are still
operational after reactivating the protection
Heat generated by the charging cable device.
and connector
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 134). Charging the high-voltage battery via
the electrical outlet
During the charging process, the charging
cable and connector may heat up. Charging cable
The charging cable and connector will only
heat up within the permissible limiting values, Important safety notes
provided that: The vehicle is supplied with a single-phase
Rthe
12 A charging cable. Only use the charging
power supply and the charging cable
cable included with the vehicle, which has
are not damaged
been approved for vehicle use.
Rthe instructions for handling the charging
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
cable and controls on the charging cable
(Y page 134).
are observed
Z
! Only use the charging cable to charge the Display :

high-voltage battery. Do not use the charg-
ing cable for other purposes. It may other- Lights up The external power supply
wise be damaged. green connection is working prop-
erly. The high-voltage bat-
i If you use the supplied 12 A charging
Driving and parking
tery can be charged.

cable to charge a high-voltage battery:
Rthe charge time increases considerably Flashes red A malfunction has been
Relectrical consumption increases consid-
detected in the external
power supply. The high-volt-
erably
age battery is recharged as
Where possible, charge the high-voltage soon as the electricity signal
battery at a charging station (Y page 140). registers normal values.
Only then can certified electrical energy
consumption levels be reached. Lights up red There is a malfunction. The
charging cable must be
i The charging process can vary depending removed from the electrical
on the charging station. Therefore, always outlet and then re-inserted.
observe the local information.
Information about charging at a charging sta-
tion can be found at (Y page 140). Display ;
Stowing the charging cable Lights up There are no malfunctions.

green The high-voltage battery
The charging cable can be stowed in a bag in
can be charged.
the trunk of the vehicle. To do so, the bag
must be secured to the cargo tie-down rings Lights up red There is a malfunction. The
using the retaining strap provided. high-voltage battery cannot
be charged.
Controls on the charging cable
i For information on problems relating to

the charging process, see (Y page 142).
Setting the maximum charge current
G WARNING
If the charge current draw via a mains socket
is too high during the charging process, the
external electrical system may overheat.
There is a risk of fire.
Before beginning the charging process, check
: Alternating current status indicator the maximum permissible charge current
; Control/protection system indicator locally. Consult a qualified expert to do so
= Charge current indicator where necessary.
? Charge current setting button If necessary, adjust your vehicle's settings.
When displays : and ; on the charging ! An excessive charge current can blow a
cable light up, this means the following: fuse or lead to overheating of the external
power supply. Check whether the external
power supply is compatible with the set
charge current. If necessary, lower the set the controls on the charging cable or in the
charge current or use another power on-board computer's menu.
socket.
You can set a limit for the values of the charge Connecting the charging cable
current used in charging the high-voltage bat-
Driving and parking

tery. This acts as a means of preventing the
power supply from overloading. You can set
this limit by using the controls on the charging
cable or in the on-board computer's menu.
Only set the maximum charge current in the
on-board computer menu if there are no
charge current settings on the charging
cable.
The default standard value is the minimum
charge current setting. This corresponds to
the minimum available charge current from
the power supply.
i The value of the maximum setting and the
adjustment values may vary depending on
the country.
Before charging the high-voltage battery,
have the maximum permissible charge cur-
rent for the relevant power socket checked by
an electrician.
X To adjust the setting: press button ?
repeatedly until the desired setting is selec- : To open the charge socket flap
ted in display =. ; Tire pressure table
RTwo LEDs are flashing: minimum setting = Vehicle charge socket cover
RAll LEDs are flashing: maximum setting ? Fastener
A Vehicle socket
Information about the charging time
(Y page 311) B Warning sticker
If, after the charging process, the charging X Shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position
cable is: P.
X Switch the ignition off.
Rleft connected to the power socket, the
currently selected values will be used for X Press the charge socket flap in the direc-
the next charging process. tion of arrow :.
Rremoved from the power socket, the values The charge socket flap swings up.
will be reset to the minimum setting for the X Slide fastener ? to the right.
next charging process. You may then need Vehicle charge socket cover = is open.
to reset the values of the maximum charge X Insert the power supply plug into the elec-
current. trical outlet to the stop.
X Insert the charging cable connector into
i If more time than usual is required when
charging the high-voltage battery, check vehicle socket A to the stop.
the maximum charge current setting using The high-voltage battery is being charged.
Z
i The vehicle must not be moved while the Charging the high-voltage battery at
charging cable is connected or during the charging station
charging.
General notes
i Depending on the temperature, the
engine cooling system and battery cooling Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
Driving and parking
system may audibly switch on when the (Y page 134).

charging cable is connected or during the
charging process. Charging communication at a charging
station
Removing the charging cable The charging station first has to be activated
When the charge level display reaches 100%, before you can charge at a charging station.
the battery is fully charged (Y page 174). You can activate the charging station by using
an RFID card or via telephone activation.
! Make sure the charging cable has been Observe the on-site operator instructions for
disconnected from the vehicle socket the charging station.
before starting a journey. The vehicle or
When the vehicle is connected to the charging
station, information and details on technical
when you drive off.
parameters are exchanged. It can thus take
up to 30 seconds for the charging process to
begin.
Connecting the charging cable
When the battery is charged:

X Press and hold button C on the charging
cable connector and remove the charging
cable from vehicle socket A.
X Close vehicle socket cover =.
X Close the charge socket flap.
X Remove the charging cable from the elec-
trical outlet.
X Stow the charging cable safely in the vehi-
cle (Y page 138).
: To open the charge socket flap

; Tire pressure table
= Vehicle charge socket cover When the battery is charged:

? Fastener X Press and hold button C on the charging
A Vehicle socket cable connector and remove the charging
B Warning sticker cable from vehicle socket A.
X Close vehicle socket cover =.
Set the DIRECT SELECT lever to position P.
Driving and parking

X
X Close the charge socket flap.
X Press the charge socket flap in the direc-
tion of arrow :.
The charge socket flap swings up.
X Slide fastener ? to the right.
Vehicle charge socket cover = is open.
X Insert the charging cable connector into
vehicle socket A to the stop.
i The vehicle must not be moved while the
charging cable is connected or during
charging.
i Depending on the temperature, the
engine cooling system and battery cooling
system may audibly switch on when the
charging cable is connected or during the
charging process.
Removing the charging cable

When the charge level display reaches 100%,
the battery is fully charged (Y page 174).
! Make sure the charging cable has been
disconnected from the vehicle socket
before starting a journey. The vehicle or
when you drive off.
Z
Problems with the charging process

The charge socket flap The charge socket flap is not unlocked.
cannot be opened.
Driving and parking
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 72).
The SmartKey batteries are discharged.

X Unlock the vehicle manually using the SmartKey (Y page 73).
The charge socket flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is

jammed.
X Lock and unlock the vehicle.
If, after that, the opening mechanism is still jammed:

The high-voltage bat- A malfunction has occurred during the initialization of the charging
tery is not being process.
charged. X Ensure that the charging cable is connected to the electrical
outlet.
X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket
and wait 30 seconds; then re-insert it into the vehicle socket.
X If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The high-voltage bat- The electrical outlet is faulty.

tery is not charged dur- X Have the electrical outlet checked to test if it is functioning
ing the charging proc- properly.
ess when connected to
or
a power socket.
X Use a different electrical outlet.
The charging cable con- The snap fastener on the charging cable connector is locked.
nector cannot be X Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector. The
removed from the vehi- snap fastener on the vehicle socket is unlocked.
cle socket. X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.
The snap fastener on the charging cable connector is blocked.

X Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector.
X Try to remove the blockage.
Online access to the vehicle Further information about the supported end
devices and available languages is available
General information at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G WARNING In order to call up the "Vehicle Homepage",
the vehicle must be connected to the Inter-
If you operate information systems and com-
Driving and parking

net.
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from This is possible via the radio module
traffic conditions. You could also lose control (Y page 144).
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
Notes on data protection
situation permits. If you are not sure that this Bear in mind that the "Vehicle Homepage"
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention offers access to your data. Therefore, look
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- after the vehicle verification code (VVC) and
ment when the vehicle is stationary. your user details carefully.
The vehicle verification code (VVC) is required
You must observe the legal requirements for
when you register for the first time on the
the country in which you are currently driving
"Vehicle Homepage". This code is used to link
when operating integrated information sys-
the vehicle and the user access on the "Vehi-
tems and communications equipment.
cle Homepage" and enables correct use. You
Only use information systems and communi- can obtain further information from an
cations devices if this is permitted while driv- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
ing and if the traffic situation permits. You Prevent unauthorized persons from
may otherwise be distracted from the traffic accessing this data.
conditions, cause an accident and injure
yourself and others. Every person who has access to the informa-
tion stated can use the functions on the "Vehi-
From the "My Mercedes Electric - Vehicle
cle Homepage".
Homepage", you can call up remote query and
RIf you sell your vehicle, you are obliged to
remote configuration functions for your vehi-
cle. This is possible from an Internet-enabled delete the vehicle from your personal area
computer, as well as many modern smart- on the "Vehicle Homepage". Additionally,
phones. you must destroy documents containing
the vehicle verification code (VVC).
You can access the "Vehicle Homepage" via
RIf you have bought a used vehicle, it is pos-
your web browser.
sible that the previous owner still has
The Internet address was not available at the
access to the "Vehicle Homepage". If in
time of going to press. Please call the
doubt, have a new vehicle verification code
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(VVC) issued by the Mercedes-Benz Center
(USA) at the hotline number
after purchase. With the new code you can
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
set up the access to your vehicle, as descri-
to obtain the relevant Internet address.
bed in the section "Setting up a personal
In order to use the "Vehicle Homepage", you area". There, you may also deactivate the
must agree to the applicable terms of use. existing access of the previous owner.
The contractual periods of mbrace apply to
the "Vehicle Homepage". To use the "Vehicle
Homepage", you require an activated mbrace
access and a separate activation/registra-
tion for the "Vehicle Homepage".
Z
144 Parking
Calling up functions in the "My You can use the "Vehicle Homepage" if the
Mercedes Electric - Vehicle Homepage" vehicle has a connection to the Internet via a
mobile phone. The radio module uses a
The "My Mercedes Electric - Vehicle Home-
mobile phone connection and transmits the
page" allows you access to your vehicle's
necessary data by radio. The vehicle auto-
functions using remote query and remote
Driving and parking
matically recognizes whether a connection to

configuration. For example, climate control
the Internet via the radio module is possible
can be activated using remote configuration
or not. No presets are necessary.
which means that it need not be set in the
vehicle. Power for the climate control is pri- i Restrictions in reception are possible if
marily supplied via the charging cable con- the vehicle is in an underground car park,
nected to the mains supply. In this way, the for example. Restrictions may also occur in
range of the vehicle in most cases is not areas with poor mobile network coverage.
reduced. If climate control is activated, the
battery charge level and thus the range may
be reduced. The "Vehicle Homepage" pro- Parking
vides you with information all about how to
use your vehicle.
If the vehicle is entered in your personal area G WARNING
of the "Vehicle Homepage", you can also If you release the parking brake on uphill or
access the following functions: downhill gradients, the vehicle can begin to
Rrequest the current condition of charge move when in park position P. There is a risk
Rprogram the departure time of an accident.
Rorder and activate the "Pre-entry climate To avoid hazardous situations:
control at departure time" function Rprevent the parked vehicle from rolling on
If the vehicle is charging, the predicted charg- uphill or downhill gradients by always
ing time and the predicted range will also be applying the parking brake.
shown. Rdo not park the vehicle on uphill or downhill
This data is estimated and may be influenced gradients if the parking brake is malfunc-
by the following factors: tioning.
Routside temperature
G WARNING
Rswitched on consumers, e.g. climate con-
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
trol and seat heating
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rpersonal driving style
Rroad and traffic conditions
Rshift the transmission out of park position
Rroute characteristics
P.
Therefore, allow for a sufficient reserve.
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet They could also operate the vehicle's equip-
ment. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Via a radio module When leaving the vehicle, always take the
i This function is not available in all coun- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
tries and requires an activated mbrace leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
access.
Parking 145
! While the vehicle is rolling, do not shift the Electric parking brake
transmission directly from D to R, from R to
D or directly to P. General notes
Do not open the driver's door while the G WARNING
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, at low If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
Driving and parking

speeds in transmission position D or R, cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
park position P is engaged automatically
and the electrical parking brake is applied.
Rshift the transmission out of park position
The transmission could be damaged.
P.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly Rstart the vehicle's drive system.
against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle
They could also operate the vehicle's equip-
or its drivetrain could be damaged.
ment. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against When leaving the vehicle, always take the
rolling away unintentionally: SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rthe transmission must be in position P.
i The function of the electric parking brake
Rthe key in the ignition lock must be turned
and the parking lock is dependent on the
to position 0 and removed from the ignition
on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is
lock. low or if there is a malfunction in the sys-
Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn tem, it may not be possible to apply the
the front wheels towards the curb. released parking brake or to shift the trans-
mission to the P position.
Switching off the drive system X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
level ground and secure it to prevent it roll-
Important safety notes ing away.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, It may not be possible to release an applied
safety-relevant functions are only available parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
with limitations, or not at all. This can affect there is a malfunction in the system. Contact
the power steering and the brake boosting a qualified specialist workshop.
effect, for example. You will require consider- i The electric parking brake carries out a
ably more effort to steer and brake. There is a function check at regular intervals when
risk of an accident. the drive system is switched off. The
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. sounds that can be heard while this is
occurring are normal.
X Shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position
P.
tion lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
Z
146 Parking
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada

only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up.
Releasing automatically
Driving and parking
Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-

matically released if all of the following con-
ditions are met:
Rthe vehicle has been started.
Rthe transmission is in position D or R.
Rthe seat belt has been fastened.
Applying/releasing manually
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
Applying If the transmission is in position R, the tailgate
X Push handle :. must be closed.
When the electric parking brake is applied, If your seat belt is not fastened, the following
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada conditions must be fulfilled to automatically
only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru- release the electric parking brake:
ment cluster.
Rthe driver's door is closed.
i The electric parking brake can also be Ryou have shifted out of transmission posi-
applied when the SmartKey is removed. tion P or you have previously driven faster
Releasing than 2 mph (3 km/h).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the i Ensure that you do not depress the accel-
ignition lock. erator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the
X Pull handle :. parking brake will be released and the vehi-
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada cle will start to move.
ter goes out. Emergency braking
The vehicle can also be braked during an
Applying automatically emergency by using the electric parking
brake.
When the vehicle's HOLD function is holding
the vehicle at a standstill, the electric parking X While driving, push handle : of the electric
brake is engaged automatically. parking brake (Y page 145).

In addition, at least one of the following con- i The vehicle is braked for as long as han-
ditions must be fulfilled: dle : of the electric parking brake is
Rthe drive system is switched off. pressed. The longer electric parking brake
Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt is handle : is depressed, the greater the
not fastened. braking force.
Rthere is a system malfunction.
Rthe power supply is insufficient.
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
period.
Driving tips 147
During braking: traffic conditions. You could also lose control

Ra warning tone sounds of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Rthe Please Release Parking Brake Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
message appears is stationary.
Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
Driving and parking

Observe the legal requirements for the coun-
try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-
ter flashes
tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- phone while driving a vehicle.
still, the electric parking brake is applied.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
Parking the vehicle for a long period
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than before operating the telephone.
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
exhaustive discharging. (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a second.
result of lack of use.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and Drive sensibly save energy
seek advice. Observe the following tips to save energy:
i You can obtain information about trickle RThe tires should always be inflated to the
chargers from a qualified specialist work- recommended tire pressure.
shop. RRemove unnecessary loads.
RRemove roof racks when they are not nee-
ded.
Driving tips RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.
General notes Energy consumption also increases when
driving in low or high outside temperatures, in
Important safety notes stop-start traffic, on short journeys and in
hilly terrain.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
Drinking and driving
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, G WARNING
for example, the power steering and the brake Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
boosting effect. You will require considerably driving are very dangerous combinations.
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
of an accident. affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. ment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
G WARNING dent is greatly increased when you drink or
If you operate mobile communication equip- take drugs and drive.
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
Z
148 Driving tips
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow The evaluation of your driving style is carried
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak- out using the following three categories:
ing drugs. RAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera-
tion processes):
- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
Driving and parking
ECO display especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty acceleration
The ECO display gives you information on how
economical your driving style is. The ECO dis- RConstant (assessment of driving behavior
play assists you in achieving the optimum at all times):
driving style in terms of consumption, taking - The bar fills up: constant speed and
the actual and selected conditions into con- avoidance of unnecessary acceleration
sideration. Your driving style can significantly and deceleration
influence the vehicle's consumption. - The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration
processes):
- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,
keeping your distance and early release
of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast
without use of the brakes.
- The bar empties: frequent braking
ECO display (example: multifunction display)
To achieve a higher value in the categories
The ECO display consists of three bars:
Acceleration and Constant
Constant, drive the vehi-
RAcceleration cle in drive program E:
RConstant
i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.
RCoasting
on the highway, only the bar for Constant
The percent value is the average value of the will change.
three bars. The three bars and the mean value
begin at the value of 50%. A higher percent- i The ECO display summaries the driving
age indicates a more economical driving characteristics from the start of the journey
style. to its completion. For this reason, the bars
change dynamically at the beginning of the
The ECO display does not indicate the actual journey. On longer journeys, there are
fuel consumption and a fixed percentage fewer changes. For more dynamic changes,
count in the ECO display does not indicate a carry out a manual reset.
fixed consumption figure.
Apart from driving style, consumption is Further information on the ECO display
dependent on many factors such as, e.g.: (Y page 177).
Rload
Rtire pressure Braking
Rcold start
Rchoice of route
Relectrical consumers switched on G WARNING
These factors are not taken into considera- If you increase the recuperation level on slip-
tion by the ECO display. pery road surfaces, the drive wheels may lose
Driving tips 149
their traction. There is an increased danger of cause the braking system to fail. There is a
skidding and accidents. risk of an accident.
Do not increase the recuperation level on slip- Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
pery road surfaces. depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
Driving and parking

The braking performance of the electric
motor using recuperative braking is, in some ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
operating modes, either reduced or not effec- results in excessive and premature wear to
tive: the brake pads.
Rwhen the condition of charge of the high- If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
voltage battery increases load, do not stop the vehicle immediately.
Rif the high-voltage battery is not yet at a Drive on for a short while. This allows the air-
normal operating temperature flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Rwhen driving close to the maximum speed
Rwhen driving at speeds close to zero
Wet roads
Rin transmission position N If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
Rduring and after ESP stability control. without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
tion from the brakes when braking for the first
If you do not make an additional effort to
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
apply the brake yourself, the braking effect
been washed or driven through deep water.
may not be sufficient. If necessary, counter-
act the reduced regenerative braking effect You have to depress the brake pedal more
by applying the brake yourself. firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front.
Downhill gradients After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-
cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-
On long, steep gradients, you must reduce the tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm up
load on the brakes by selecting maximum the brake discs, thereby drying them more
recuperation. This helps you to avoid over- quickly and protecting them against corro-
heating the brakes and wearing them out sion.
excessively.
Recuperation allows the vehicle to be decel- Limited braking performance on salt-
erated without placing a load on the braking treated roads
system.
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously
residue may form on the brake discs and
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the
brake pads. This can result in a significantly
brakes to rub by constantly applying light
longer braking distance.
pressure to the pedal. This results in exces-
RBrake occasionally to remove any possible
sive and premature wear to the brake pads.
salt residue. Make sure that you do not
Heavy and light loads endanger other road users when doing so.
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
G WARNING beginning and end of a journey.
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
driving, the braking system can overheat. This ahead.
increases the stopping distance and can even
Z
150 Driving tips
Servicing the brakes vehicle which have been approved for

Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
the instrument cluster and you hear a warn-
pads/linings which have not been approved
ing tone while the engine is running, the
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not
brake fluid level may be too low. Observe
Driving and parking
of an equivalent quality could affect your vehi-

additional warning messages in the multi-
cle's operating safety.
function display.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
use brake fluid that has been specially
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,
Have the brake system checked immedi- or which corresponds to an equivalent quality
ately. This work should be carried out at a standard. Brake fluid which has not been
qualified specialist workshop. approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
! A function or performance test should which is not of an equivalent quality could
only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamom- affect your vehicle's operating safety.
eter. If you are planning to have the vehicle
tested on such a dynamometer, contact an Checking brake lining thickness
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to You can measure the break pad/lining thick-
obtain further information first. Otherwise, ness using a test gage. Color-coding (green or
you could damage the drive train or the red) on the test gage allows you to determine
brake system. whether the brake pad/lining thickness is still
! As the ESP system operates automati- sufficient. The test gage is in the vehicle docu-
cally, the engine and the ignition must be ment wallet in the glove box.
switched off (the SmartKey must be in posi-
tion 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if:
Rthe electric parking brake is tested on a
brake dynamometer (for a maximum of
ten seconds)
Rthe vehicle is towed with the front axle
raised.
Braking triggered automatically by ESP
may seriously damage the brake system.
All checks and maintenance work on the
brake system must be carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop to arrange this.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Front wheel
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the function-
ality of your brakes at regular intervals.
You can find a description of Brake Assist
(BAS) on (Y page 63).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
have brake pads/linings installed on your
Driving tips 151
Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth
on the road surface, there is a danger of
Driving and parking

hydroplaning occurring, even if:
Ryou drive at low speeds.
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
you must drive in the following manner:
Rlower your speed.
Ravoidruts.
Rbrake carefully.
Rear wheel
X Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable Driving on flooded roads
position so that you can attach test gage ! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in
A. front or in the opposite direction create
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away waves. This may cause the maximum per-
(Y page 144). missible water depth to be exceeded.
X Shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to P. Failure to observe these notes may result in
X Switch off the drive system. damage to the engine, electrical systems
X Place test gage A between the wheel's
and transmission.
spokes on brake pad/lining =. ! Do not drive through flooded areas.
X Hold test gage A vertically on brake Check the depth of any water before driving
disc : and slide measuring pin ; onto through it. Drive slowly through standing
brake disc :. water. Otherwise, water could enter the
X Check which color field ? the arrow on vehicle interior or the drive system.
measuring pin ; is pointing to. These notes must be observed under all
Green: the brake pad/lining thickness is circumstances. Otherwise, the drive sys-
sufficient. tem, electrical systems and transmission
Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is not could be damaged.
sufficient. Have the brake pads/lining If you have to drive on stretches of road on
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. which water has collected, please bear in
mind that:
i To avoid an inaccurate measurement:
Rthe maximum permissible fording depth in
Rmake sure you position the wheels suit-
still water is 10 in (25 cm)
ably
Ryou should drive no faster than at a walking
Rdo not put the measuring pin on a recess
pace
in the brake disc
Z
152 Driving systems
Winter driving Driving systems

General notes Cruise control
G WARNING Important safety notes
If you increase the recuperation level on slip-
Driving and parking
Cruise control maintains a constant road

pery road surfaces, the drive wheels may lose speed for you. In order to avoid exceeding the
their traction. There is an increased danger of set speed, it decelerates automatically.
skidding and accidents.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
Do not increase the recuperation level on slip- control can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
pery road surfaces. dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise
control cannot take into account the road,
At the onset of winter, have your vehicle win-
traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control
terized at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.
is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road for braking in good time and for staying in
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering your lane.
and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
control.
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
stopped when moving at low speed: set any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position Do not use cruise control:
N. Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
The outside temperature indicator is not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
designed to serve as an ice-warning device in heavy traffic or on winding roads
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
played after a short delay. traction and the vehicle could then skid
Indicated temperatures just above the freez- Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- heavy rain or snow
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You driver of the speed stored.
should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing Cruise control lever
point.
For more information on driving with snow You can operate cruise control with the cruise
chains, see (Y page 280). control lever.
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (Y page 280).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (Y page 280).
Driving systems 153
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up :
or down ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
Driving and parking

pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
: To activate or increase speed stored speed is resumed when the gradient
; To activate or reduce speed evens out. Cruise control maintains the
= To deactivate cruise control stored speed on downhill gradients by
? To activate at the current speed/last automatically decelerating the vehicle.
stored speed
Storing the current speed or calling up the
When you activate cruise control, the stored last stored speed
speed is shown in the multifunction display
G WARNING
for 5 seconds.
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
Activation conditions from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
To activate cruise control, all of the following stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
activation conditions must be fulfilled: brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
Rthe electric parking brake must be dent.
released. Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
(30 km/h). do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
RESP must be active, but not intervening.
Rthe DIRECT SELECT lever must be in posi- X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
tion D. you ?.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
Storing, maintaining and calling up a pedal.
speed The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
Storing and maintaining the current speed of the vehicle to the previously
speed stored speed.
You can store the current speed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
Z
154 Driving systems
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a i The last speed stored is cleared when you
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. switch off the drive system.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or HOLD function
Driving and parking
down ; to the pressure point. Important safety notes

Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed G WARNING
stored is increased or reduced. When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
press the cruise control lever up : or
the voltage supply.
down ; to the pressure point.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
stored is increased or reduced. pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you partment, the battery or the fuses have
depress the accelerator pedal. For exam- been tampered with.
ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, Rthe battery is disconnected
cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed
to the last speed stored after you have fin-
ished overtaking. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
Deactivating cruise control against rolling away.
There are several ways to deactivate cruise ! If the HOLD function is activated, the vehi-
control: cle brakes automatically in certain situa-
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- tions. To prevent damage to the vehicle,
wards = . deactivate the HOLD function in the follow-
ing or other similar situations:
or
Rwhen towing the vehicle
X Brake.
Rin the car wash
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
Deactivating the HOLD function
Rthe vehicle is secured with the electric (Y page 155).
parking brake
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph
General notes
(30 km/h)
RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
Ryou shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to posi-
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep
tion N while driving
slopes
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con
trol Off message in the multifunction dis- Rwhen waiting in traffic
play for approximately 5 seconds. The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
Driving systems 155
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
function deactivated when you depress the certain amount of pressure until : disap-
accelerator pedal to pull away. pears from the multifunction display.
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric
Activation conditions parking brake.
Driving and parking

You can activate the HOLD function if: i After a time, the electric parking brake
Rthe vehicle is stationary secures the vehicle and relieves the service
Rthe drive system is switched on
brake.
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt The electric parking brake automatically
is fastened secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is
Rthe electric parking brake is released
activated and:
Rthe transmission position D, R or N is Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
engaged seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe drive system is switched off.
Activating the HOLD function Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission
may be shifted into position P automatically.
i If you do not deactivate the HOLD func-
tion before you switch off the drive system,
you can no longer start the drive system.
Deactivate the HOLD function before you
X Make sure that the activation conditions switch off the drive system.
are met.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further PARKTRONIC
until : appears in the multifunction dis- Important safety notes
play.
The HOLD function is activated. You can PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
release the brake pedal. ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area
around your vehicle using six sensors in the
i If depressing the brake pedal the first front bumper and four sensors in the rear
time does not activate the HOLD function, bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and
wait briefly and then try again. audibly the distance between your vehicle
and an object.
Deactivating the HOLD function PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-
The HOLD function is deactivated automati- ment for your attention to your immediate
cally if: surroundings. You are always responsible for
safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-
Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in
ing space. When maneuvering, parking or
position D or R.
pulling out of a parking space, make sure that
Rthe transmission is in position P.
there are no persons, animals or objects in
the area in which you are maneuvering.
Z
156 Driving systems
! When parking, pay particular attention to

objects above or below the sensors, such
as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK-
TRONIC does not detect such objects when
they are in the immediate vicinity of the
Driving and parking
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or

the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a : Example: sensors in the front bumper,
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause right-hand side
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
you:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rshiftthe transmission to position D, R or N
Side view
Rrelease the electric parking brake.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
Range of the sensors

General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-
sideration that are:
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-
mals or objects Top view
Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang- The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
ing loads, truck overhangs or loading slush. They can otherwise not function cor-
ramps. rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them
(Y page 259).
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)
Driving systems 157
Rear sensors ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow

segments showing operational readiness =
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
light up.
120 cm)
The selected transmission position and the
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
Driving and parking

80 cm) mine which warning display is active when the
drive system is running.
Minimum distance
Transmission Warning display
Center Approx. 8 in (approx. position
20 cm)
D Front area activated
Corners Approx. 8 in (approx.
20 cm) R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas
is rolling back- activated
If there is an obstacle within this range, the wards
relevant warning displays light up and a warn- P No areas activated
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below
the minimum, the distance may no longer be
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
shown.
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
Warning displays
From the:
The warning displays show the distance Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an
between the sensors and the obstacle. The intermittent warning tone for approx-
warning display for the front area is located imately 2 seconds
on the dashboard above the center air vents.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
The warning display for the rear area is loca-
warning tone for approximately 2 seconds.
ted on the headliner in the rear compartment.
This indicates that you have now reached
the minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
Warning display for the front area

: Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the
: Indicator lamp
vehicle
; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning display for each side of the vehi- If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is
cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg- deactivated.
Z
158 Driving systems
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated

when you turn the key to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Driving and parking
Driving systems 159
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
Driving and parking

warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
2 seconds.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately 5 seconds, and
the indicator lamp in
the PARKTRONIC but-
ton lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 259).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx- The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
imately 5 seconds. ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist G WARNING

The vehicle swings out when parking and in
General notes
doing so could cross into the opposite lane.
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking This could result in a collision with another
aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on road user. There is a risk of an accident.
both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol Pay attention to other road users when park-
indicates a suitable parking space. Active ing. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the
steering intervention can assist you during Active Parking Assist parking procedure.
maneuvering and parking. You may also use
PARKTRONIC (Y page 155). ! If unavoidable, you should drive over
obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a
Important safety notes sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
the wheels or tires.
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
immediate surroundings. You are always parking spaces which are not suitable for
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking parking, for example:
and exiting a parking space. Make sure that Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
no persons, animals or objects are in the Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
maneuvering range.
Ron unsuitable surfaces
When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active
Parking Assist is also unavailable.
Z
160 Driving systems
Parking tips: You may cause a collision as a result. There is

ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- a risk of an accident.
ing space as possible. If there are objects above the detection range,
RParking spaces that are littered or over- stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
grown might be identified or measured
Driving and parking
incorrectly. For further information on the detection

range (Y page 156).
RParking spaces that are partially occupied
by trailer drawbars might not be identified Active Parking Assist does not support you
as such or be measured incorrectly. with parking spaces parallel to the direction
of travel if:
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately. Rthe parking space is on a curb
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC Rthe parking space is apparently blocked,
(Y page 157) warning messages during the for example by foliage or grass paving
parking procedure. blocks
RYou can intervene in the steering procedure Rthe range of movement is too small
to correct it at any time. Active Parking Rthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-
Assist will then be canceled. cle which is not clearly defined such as a
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes tree or a trailer
from your vehicle, you should not use
Active Parking Assist.
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are installed.
RMake sure that the tire pressures are
always correct. This has a direct influence
on the parking characteristics of the vehi-
cle. : Detected parking space on the left
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: ; Parking symbol
= Detected parking space on the right
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends Active Parking Assist is automatically activa-
ted when driving forwards. The system is
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.
operational at speeds of up to approximately
not on the pavement
22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the
system independently locates and measures
Detecting parking spaces parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
Active Parking Assist will not be detected spaces:
when the parking space is measured. These Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
are not taken into account when the parking
Rthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods Rthat are at least 39 in (1 m) longer than your
vehicles. vehicle
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
G WARNING (30 km/h), you will see parking symbol as a
If there are objects above the detection range, status indicator in the instrument cluster.
Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely. When a parking space has been detected, an
Driving systems 161
arrow towards the right or the left also i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve
appears. By default, Active Parking Assist the best parking results by backing up as
only displays parking spaces on the front- far as possible. When doing so, also
passenger side. Parking spaces on the driv- observe the PARKTRONIC messages.
er's side are displayed as soon as the turn X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
Driving and parking

signal on the driver's side is activated. This continuous warning tone, if not before.
must remain switched on until you acknowl- Maneuvering may be required in tight park-
edge the use of Active Parking Assist by ing spaces.
pressing the a button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Select D
A parking space is displayed while you are Observe Surroundings message appears in
driving past it, and until you are approx- the multifunction display.
imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. X Shift the transmission to position D while
the vehicle is stationary.
Parking Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction.
G WARNING The Park Assist Active Accelerate
Active Parking Assist merely aids you by inter- and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
vening actively in the steering. If you do not sage appears in the multifunction display.
brake there is a risk of an accident. i You will achieve the best results by wait-
Always apply the brakes yourself when ing for the steering procedure to complete
maneuvering and parking. before pulling away.
X Stop the vehicle when the parking space X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
symbol shows the desired parking space in times.
the instrument cluster. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
X Shift the transmission to position R. continuous warning tone, if not before.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: The Park Assist Active Select R
% message appears in the multifunction Observe Surroundings message appears in
display. the multifunction display.
X To cancel the procedure: press the % Further transmission shifts may be neces-
button on the multifunction steering wheel sary.
or pull away. As soon as the parking procedure is com-
X To park using Active Parking Assist: plete, the Park Assist Finished message
press the a button on the multifunction appears in the multifunction display and you
steering wheel. will hear a tone.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate Active Parking Assist no longer supports you
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes- with steering interventions. When Active
sage appears in the multifunction display. Parking Assist is finished, you must steer
X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available.
X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at X Maneuver if necessary.
all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed X Always observe the warning messages dis-
of approximately 5 mph (10 km/h) when played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 157).
backing up. Otherwise Active Parking Parking tips:
Assist will be canceled.
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the
parking space after parking is dependent
Z
162 Driving systems
on various factors. These include the posi- X To exit a parking space using Active
tion and shape of the vehicles parked in Parking Assist: press the a button on
front and behind it and the conditions of the the multifunction steering wheel.
location. It may be the case that Active The Park Assist Active Accelerate
Parking Assist guides you too far into a and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
Driving and parking
parking space, or not far enough into it. In sage appears in the multifunction display.
some cases, it may also lead you across or X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
onto the curb. If necessary, you should can- X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being
cel the parking procedure with Active Park- ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a
ing Assist. maximum speed of approximately 6 mph
RYou can also engage forward gear prema- (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space.
turely. The vehicle redirects and does not Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can-
drive as far into the parking space. Should a celed.
gear be changed too early, the parking pro- X Stop when PARKTRONIC sounds the con-
cedure will be canceled. A sensible parking tinuous warning tone, if not before.
position can no longer be achieved from
X Shift the transmission to position D or R as
this position.
required while the vehicle is stationary.
Exiting a parking space Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction. The Park Assist
In order that Active Parking Assist can sup- Active Accelerate and Brake
port you when you exit the parking space: Observe Surroundings message appears
Rthe border of the parking space must be in the multifunction display.
high enough. A curb is too small, for exam- i You will achieve the best results by wait-
ple. ing for the steering procedure to complete
Rthe border of the parking space must not be before pulling away.
too wide. Your vehicle can be maneuvered If you back up after activation, the steering
into a position at a maximum of 45 to the wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
starting position in the parking space. tion.
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by
(1.0 m) must be available. the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several
Active Parking Assist can only assist you with times if necessary.
exiting a parking space if you have parked the X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using continuous warning tone, if not before.
Active Parking Assist.
Once you have exited the parking space com-
X Start the drive system. pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
X Switch on the turn signal in the direction straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and
you will drive out of the parking space. the Park Assist Finished message
X Shift the transmission to position D or R. appears in the multifunction display. You will
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: then have to steer and merge into traffic on
% message appears in the multifunction your own. PARKTRONIC is still available.
display.
X To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel
or pull away.
or
Driving systems 163
Canceling Active Parking Assist Rear view camera

You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any General notes
time.
X Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Driving and parking

Active Parking Assist will be canceled at
once. The Park Assist Canceled mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
or
X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the cen-
ter console (Y page 157).
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
Parking Assist is immediately canceled.
The Park Assist Canceled message Rear view camera : is in the handle on the
appears in the multifunction display. tailgate.
Active Parking Assist is canceled automati- The rear view camera is an optical parking and
cally if: maneuvering aid. It uses guide lines to show
Rthe
the area behind your vehicle in the Audio/
electric parking brake is engaged
COMAND display.
Rtransmission position P is selected
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
longer possible
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) i The text shown in the COMAND display
depends on the language setting. The fol-
Ra wheel spins, ESP intervenes or fails. The
lowing are examples of rear view camera
warning lamp lights up in the instru- messages in the COMAND display.
ment cluster.
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 260).
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol
goes out and the Park Assist Canceled
message appears in the multifunction dis- Important safety notes
play. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must replacement for your attention to your imme-
steer again yourself. diate surroundings. You are always responsi-
ble for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting
a parking space. When maneuvering or park-
ing, make sure that there are no persons, ani-
mals or objects in the area in which you are
maneuvering.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function
in a limited manner:
Rif the tailgate is open
Rif there is heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
Z
164 Driving systems
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
lighting (the display may flicker) Rthe rear section of an HGV
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, Ra slanted post
e.g. when driving into a heated garage from Use the guidelines only for orientation.
the cold Approach objects no further than the bot-
Driving and parking
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed tom-most guideline.

Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
case, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the
rear view camera may be restricted due to
additional accessories on the rear of the vehi-
cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).
Activating/deactivating the rear view

camera
X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey Lanes
is in position 2 in the ignition lock. : White guide line without turning the steer-
X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear" ing wheel, vehicle width including the
setting is active in the audio system/ exterior mirrors (static)
COMAND (see the separate audio system/ ; Yellow lane marking tires at current steer-
COMAND operating instructions). ing wheel angle, vehicle width to the outer
X Engage reverse gear. side of the wheels (dynamic)
Guide lines are used to show the area = Red guide line for the vehicle width includ-
behind the vehicle in the Audio/COMAND ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer-
display. ing wheel angle (dynamic)
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti- ? Bumper
vates if you shift the transmission to P or after
driving forwards a short distance.
Displays in the Audio/COMAND display

The rear view camera may show a distorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. The rear view camera does not show
objects in the following positions:
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate Guide lines
handle ? Bumper
A Red guide line at a distance of approx-
! Objects not at ground level may appear to imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
vehicle
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Driving systems 165
B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- Backing up straight into a parking space
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the without turning the steering wheel
vehicle
C Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
D Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
Driving and parking

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
The lanes and guide lines are only displayed if
you have engaged reverse gear.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
: White lane with steering wheel straight

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
= Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
X Use white lane : to check whether the
vehicle will fit into the parking space.
Additional displays on vehicles with PARKTRONIC X Using the white lane as a guide, carefully
and COMAND back up until you reach the end position.
: Front warning display Red guide line = is then at the end of the
; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement parking space. The vehicle is almost paral-
operational readiness indicator lel in the parking space.
= Rear warning display
Reverse perpendicular parking with the
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC and COMAND: steering wheel at an angle
when PARKTRONIC is operational, the addi- X Drive past the parking space and bring the
tional measurement operational indicator vehicle to a standstill.
appears in the COMAND display. If the PARK-
TRONIC warning displays light up, warning
displays : and = in the COMAND display
are also active.
"Reverse parking" function

X Make sure that the rear view camera is
activated and the "Reverse parking" func-
tion is selected (see the separate operating
instructions for the audio system/
COMAND).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
Z
166
Driving and parking Driving systems
Turning the steering wheel Driving to the final position

: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle : White lane at current steering wheel angle
will take with the steering wheel in its cur- ; Parking space marking
rent position
X Turn the steering wheel to the center posi-
; Parking space marking
tion while the vehicle is stationary.
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the park-
ing space until the red lane reaches parking
space marking ;.
X Keep the steering wheel in that position
and back up carefully.
: Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
; White lane with steering wheel straight
= End of parking space
X Back up carefully until you have reached
Backing up with the steering wheel turned
the final position.
: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
will take with the steering wheel in its cur- space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in
rent position the parking space.
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel ATTENTION ASSIST
with the parking space marking as possi-
ble. General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways.
It is active in the range between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).
Driving systems 167
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica- intermittent warning tone twice and the
tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con- Attention Assist: Take a Break!
centration on the part of the driver, it sug- message appears in the multifunction dis-
gests you take a break. play.
X If necessary, take a break.
Driving and parking

Important safety notes X Press the a or % button to confirm
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the the message.

driver. It might not always recognize fatigue On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
recognize them at all. The system is not a do not take a break, you will be warned again
substitute for a well-rested and attentive after 15 minutes at the earliest. The precon-
driver. dition for this is that ATTENTION ASSIST still
ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of detects typical indicators of fatigue or
fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking increasing lapses in concentration.
the following criteria into account: ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con-
Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering tinue your journey and starts assessing your
characteristics tiredness again if:
Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length Ryou switch off the drive system.
of journey Ryou take off your seat belt and open the
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
restricted and warnings may be delayed or to take a break.
not occur at all: When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur- symbol appears in the multifunction
face is uneven or if there are potholes display in the assistance graphic display.
Rif there is a strong side wind
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
Blind Spot Assist
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration General notes
Rif you are predominantly driving slower
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than to monitor the areas on both sides of your
112 mph (180 km/h) vehicle. It supports you from a speed of
Rif you are currently using COMAND or mak- approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
ing a telephone call with it display in the exterior mirrors draws your
Rif the time has been set incorrectly attention to vehicles detected in the moni-
Rin active driving situations, such as when tored area. If you then switch on the corre-
you change lanes or change your speed sponding turn signal to change lanes, you will
also receive a visual and audible collision
Warning and display messages in the warning. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist
multifunction display uses sensors in the rear bumper.
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-

board computer (Y page 184).
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be
warned no sooner than 20 minutes after
your journey has begun. You then hear an
Z
168 Driving systems
Important safety notes Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
Driving and parking
placing them in the blind spot area

Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to

detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving.
i USA only: Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft
This device has been approved by the FCC (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For
sensor is intended for use in an automotive this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar
radar system only. Removing, tampering sensors in the rear bumper.
with, or altering the device will void any If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
warranties, and is not permitted by the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
any non-approved way. driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
Any unauthorized modification to this the case as soon as the vehicles are driving on
device could void the users authority to the inner side of their lane.
operate the equipment. Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
Monitoring range of the sensors
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
In particular, the detection of obstacles can lane borders.
be impaired if: Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.
covering the sensors trucks, for a prolonged time.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are
rain or snow integrated into the sides of the rear bumper.
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice
motorbike or bicycle or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. For
Rthe road has very wide lanes example, the radar sensors must not be cov-
ered by bicycle racks or overhanging loads.
Rthe road has narrow lanes
Following a severe impact or in the event of
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
damage to the bumpers, have the function of
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
Driving systems 169
cialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may oth- the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected
erwise not work properly. are indicated by the flashing of red warning
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Warning and indicator lamps
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
Driving and parking

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activa-
the monitoring range are then not indicated. ted in the on-board computer
(Y page 184).
tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds
and then turn yellow.
: Red warning lamp/yellow indicator lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-
low at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At
speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica-
tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is
operational.
if a vehicle is detected at speeds of approx-
imately 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp :
on the corresponding side lights up red. This
warning occurs when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
the warning only occurs as long as the differ-
ence in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot
Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the warning/indicator
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the
corresponding turn signal, a double warning
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
Z
170
171
On-board computer and displays

Displays and operation .................... 172
Menus and submenus ...................... 176
Display messages ............................. 190
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 216
172 Displays and operation
Useful information times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not oper-

ating safely may cause an accident.

i This Operator's Manual describes all If the operating safety of your vehicle is
models and all standard and optional equip- impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do
ment of your vehicle available at the time of so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
publication of the Operator's Manual. For an overview, see the instrument panel
Country-specific differences are possible. illustration (Y page 31).
applies to safety-relevant systems and Displays and operation
functions.
Instrument cluster lighting
ist workshops: (Y page 24). The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
displays and the controls in the vehicle inte-
rior can be adjusted using the brightness con-
Important safety notes trol knob.
The brightness control knob is located on the
G WARNING bottom left of the instrument cluster
(Y page 31).
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise
cle while driving, you will be distracted from or counter-clockwise.
traffic conditions. You could also lose control If the light switch is set to , T or
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. L, the brightness is dependent upon
Only operate the equipment when the traffic the brightness of the ambient light.
situation permits. If you are not sure that this i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention automatically controls the brightness of
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- the multifunction display.
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
In daylight, the displays in the instrument
cluster are not illuminated.
G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
functioned, you may not recognize function READY indicator
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The
operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
You must observe the legal requirements for

the country in which you are currently driving When the drive system is started and the
when operating the on-board computer. vehicle is ready to drive, READY indicator :
The on-board computer only shows messages appears in the multifunction display. This indi-
or warnings from certain systems in the mul- cates that the vehicle is operational.
tifunction display. You should therefore make
sure your vehicle is operating safely at all
Displays and operation 173
Outside temperature display Rvery low condition of charge of the high-

voltage battery
You should pay special attention to road con-
Ra malfunction in the drive system
ditions when temperatures are around freez-
ing point. The reduced power output can be improved
by charging the high-voltage battery
Bear in mind that the outside temperature
(Y page 134).
display indicates the temperature measured
and does not record the road temperature.
The outside temperature display is in the mul- Power display
tifunction display (Y page 176).
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay.
E-CELL display
Power display : contains two areas:

RArea above 0
Here, the current amount of power that the
drive system is feeding to the wheels is dis-
played.
RArea below 0
G WARNING
There is a risk of an accident if you accelerate Here, the vehicle's recuperative power in
or overtake when the power output of the overrun mode is displayed.
drive system is reduced. If the needle for the power display is in the
You should therefore adapt your driving style OFF position, the vehicle is not ready to drive
and drive particularly carefully. Charge the because:
high-voltage battery at a charge station imme- Rthe drive system has not yet started
diately. Rthe charging cable is still connected to the
vehicle socket
X Start the drive system (Y page 127).
Rthere is insufficient power available from
E-CELL display : shows the available
power of the drive system. the high-voltage battery
Rthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical system
Under normal operating conditions, E-CELL
is malfunctioning
display : is in the maximum range.
When the drive system is started, the needle
The power output available may deviate from
in the power display moves to position 0. The
the maximum range in the event of:
display Ready appears in the lower multifunc-
Rvery high or low outside temperatures tion display. The vehicle is ready to drive.
Rvery high performance requirements for a The boost area for maximum acceleration can
longer period of time be reached using kickdown (Y page 131).
Z
174 Displays and operation
The braking performance of the electric The braking performance of the electric
motor using recuperative braking is, in some motor using recuperative braking is, in some
operating modes, either reduced or not effec- operating modes, either reduced or not effec-
tive: tive:
Rwhen the condition of charge of the high- Rwhen the condition of charge of the high-
voltage battery increases voltage battery increases
Rif the high-voltage battery is not yet at a Rif the high-voltage battery is not yet at a
normal operating temperature normal operating temperature
Rwhen the vehicle is almost stationary Rwhen the vehicle is almost stationary
Rin transmission position N Rin transmission position N
Rduring and after ESP stability control Rduring and after ESP stability control
If necessary, counteract the reduced regen- If necessary, counteract the reduced regen-
erative braking effect by applying the brake erative braking effect by applying the brake
yourself. yourself.
Charge level display Operating the on-board computer

Overview
Condition of charge display : shows the

condition of charge of the high-voltage bat-
tery. The charge values are shown as a per-
centage in the COMAND display (see the sep-
arate operating instructions).
The condition of charge of the high-voltage
battery has dropped into the reserve range if
: Multifunction display
the drive system is running and:
; Switches on the Voice Control System
Rthe Drive Battery Reserve Level mes- (see the separate operating instructions)
sage appears in the display = Right control panel
Rthe indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
? Left control panel
lights up
A Back button
i Charge the high-voltage battery from a X To activate the on-board computer: turn
condition of charge of less than 20% at: the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
Ran electrical outlet lock.
Ra charging station
Displays and operation 175
You can control the multifunction display and Right control panel

the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering ~ RRejects or ends a call
wheel. RExits phone book/redial mem-
ory
Left control panel
6 RMakes or accepts a call
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar RSwitches to the redial memory
; W RAdjusts the volume
9 Press briefly: X
: RScrolls in lists 8 RMute
RSelects a submenu or function

RIn the Audio menu: selects a Back button
stored station, an audio track or
a video scene % Press briefly:
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: RBack
switches to the phone book and RSwitches off the Voice Control
selects a name or telephone System (see the separate oper-
number ating instructions)
RHides display messages/calls
9 Press and hold:
up the last Trip menu function
: RIn the Audio menu: selects the used
previous/next station or selects RExits the telephone book/redial
an audio track or a video scene
memory
using rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: % Press and hold:
starts rapid scrolling through the RCalls up the standard display in
phone book the Trip menu
a RConfirms a selection/display
message
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station
Z
176 Menus and submenus
Multifunction display Menus and submenus

Menu overview
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 174).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
RTrip menu (Y page 176)
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 179)
RAudio menu (Y page 180)
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 181)
RDriveAssist menu (assistance)
(Y page 183)
RServ. menu (Y page 184)
RSett menu (Y page 185)
Multifunction display
The Audio
Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly
: Range
in vehicles with an audio system and in vehi-
; Time cles with COMAND. The examples given in
= Text field this Operator's Manual apply to vehicles
? Menu bar equipped with COMAND.
A Drive program
B Permanent display: outside temperature
or speed(Y page 187) Trip menu
C Transmission position(Y page 129) Standard display
X To show menu bar ?: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or
submenu as well as display messages.
i You can set the time using the Audio sys-
tem or COMAND (see the separate operat- Standard display
ing instructions).
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
The following messages may appear in the ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
multifunction display: The Trip menu with trip odometer : and
XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 159) odometer ; is shown.
Cruise control (Y page 152)
CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 152)
HOLD function (Y page 154)
Menus and submenus 177
Digital speedometer The From Reset trip computer is automati-

cally reset if the value exceeds 999 hours or
9999 miles.
Resetting values
Digital speedometer
: Digital speedometer
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
Resetting the "From start" trip computer
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer. You can reset the values of the following func-
tions:
Trip computer "From Start" or "From RTrip odometer
Reset" R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
function that you wish to reset.
X Press the a button.
"From Start" trip computer
X Press the : button to select Yes and
: Distance
press the a button to confirm.
; Time
= Average speed i When you reset the values in the "ECO
? Average electrical consumption display", the values in the trip computer
"From Start" are likewise reset. When you
reset the values in the trip computer "From
Start", the values in the "ECO display" are
X Press the 9 or : button to select
likewise reset.
From Start or From Reset.
Reset
The values in the From Start submenu are ECO display
calculated from the start of a journey whilst
the values in the From Reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (Y page 177).
The From Start trip computer is automati-
cally reset when:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than 4 hours. ECO display
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
Z
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Trip menu. ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
ECO DISPLAY.
DISPLAY wheel.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer X Use : or 9 to select Energy Flow. Flow
than 4 hours, the ECO display will be auto- The active components are highlighted in
matically reset. the energy flow display.
Further information on the ECO display i The energy flow is indicated by arrows.
(Y page 148). The arrows have a different color depend-
ing on the operating state:
Displaying the range and current con- RGreen: energy recuperation
sumption RWhite: normal energy consumption
RRed: increased energy consumption
Drive system switched on when the vehi-

cle is stationary or in overrun mode
Range and current consumption

X Press the 9 or : button to view the
approximate range and current consump- The drive system is switched on while the
tion. vehicle is stationary. Alternatively, the drive
system is switched on while the vehicle is in
The approximate range depends on the con- transmission position D+ or N.
dition of charge of the high-voltage battery
and your current driving style. If the high-volt- The arrows indicating energy flow are not
age battery condition of charge is low, the shown.
display shows a vehicle being charged Drive system switched off and high-volt-
instead of the approximate range. age battery being charged
The specified values for range depend on the
driving program selected and may vary as a
result of:
Rhigher and lower outside temperatures
Rthe style of driving
Ractivated electrical consumers
Energy flow The drive system is switched off. The charging

cable is connected and the high-voltage bat-
The energy flow display can be displayed in tery is being charged.
the multifunction display and in the COMAND The arrows for the energy flow are shown in
display (see separate operating instructions). green.
Normal driving Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
(see the separate operating instructions).
ing wheel to select the Navi menu.
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
The drive system powers the vehicle. shows navigation instructions. You can find
The arrows for the energy flow are shown in further information in the separate operating
white. instructions.
Boost driving mode
Route guidance not active
The boost mode takes effect if you depress

the accelerator pedal quickly. Route guidance not active
: Direction of travel
The arrows for the energy flow are shown in
red. ; Current road
Energy recuperation mode Route guidance active

No change of direction announced
The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted

into electrical energy. The high-voltage bat-
tery is being charged. No change of direction announced
: Distance to the destination
The arrows for the energy flow are shown in
green. ; Distance to the next change of direction
= Current road
? "Follow the road's course" symbol
Z
Change of direction announced without a Lane recommendations are only displayed if

lane recommendation the relevant data is available on the digital

map.
Other status indicators of the naviga-

tion system
RO: you have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
RNew Route... or Calculating Route:Route
Change of direction announced without a lane rec-
ommendation calculating a new route
: Road into which the change of direction ROff Map or Off Mapped Road Road: the vehicle
leads position is outside the area of the digital
; Distance to change of direction and visual map (off-map position).
distance display RNo Route:
Route no route could be calculated to
= Change-of-direction symbol the selected destination.
When a change of direction is announced, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction Audio menu
and distance graphic ;. The distance indi-
cator shortens towards the top of the display Selecting a radio station
as you approach the point of the announced
change of direction.
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
Example: radio station (multifunction display)

: Waveband
; Channel frequency with memory position
i The memory position is only displayed
Change of direction announced with a lane recom- along with station ; if this has been
mendation
stored.
: Road into which the change of direction
leads X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
and select Radio (see the separate operat-
; Distance to change of direction and visual
ing instructions).
distance display
= New lane during a change of direction
ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
? Uninterrupted lane
X To select a stored station: briefly press
A Lane recommendation
the 9 or : button.
B Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, the system can display
lane recommendation = for the next change
of direction. During the change of direction,
additional lanes may be displayed.
X To select a station from the station list: audio drives or data carriers support this

press and briefly hold the 9 or : function.
button. If track information is stored on the audio
If no station list is received: device or medium, the multifunction display
X To select a station using the station will show the number and title of the track.
search: press and briefly hold the 9 The current track does not appear in audio
or : button. AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected).
i Information on how to switch wavebands
and store stations can be found in the sep- Video DVD operation
arate operating instructions.
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
You can find further information on operat-
ing the satellite radio in the separate oper-
ating instructions.
Operating audio devices or media Example: CD/DVD changer display (multifunction

display)
: Current scene
X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD
(see the separate operating instructions).
ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous scene:
Example: CD/DVD changer display (multifunction briefly press the 9 or : button.
display)
X To select a scene from the scene list
: Current title
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
Audio data from various audio devices or or : button until desired scene : has
media can be played, depending on the equip- been reached.
ment installed in the vehicle.
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
and select audio CD, audio DVD or MP3 Telephone menu
mode (see the separate operating instruc-
tions). Introduction
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- G WARNING
ing wheel to select the Audio menu. If you operate information systems and com-
X To select the next/previous track: munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
briefly press the 9 or : button. cle while driving, you will be distracted from
X To select a track from the track list traffic conditions. You could also lose control
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
or : button until desired track : has Only operate the equipment when the traffic
been reached. situation permits. If you are not sure that this
If you press and hold 9 or :, the is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all
Z
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- Accepting a call

ment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the

legal requirements for the country in which
you are currently driving.
X Switch on the mobile phone and audio sys-
tem or COMAND (see the separate operat-
ing instructions). Example: incoming call (multifunction display)
X Establish a Bluetooth connection to the X Press the 6 button on the steering
audio system or COMAND (see the sepa- wheel to accept an incoming call.
rate operating instructions).
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel
menu, a display message appears in the mul-
ing wheel to select the Tel menu. tifunction display.
You will see one of the following display mes- You can accept a call even if you are not in the
sages in the multifunction display: Tel menu.
RPlease Enter PIN
PIN: the mobile phone has
been placed in the mobile phone bracket Rejecting or ending a call
and the PIN has not been entered. X Press the ~ button on the steering
When you enter your PIN via the mobile wheel.
phone, the Voice Control System, the audio
system or COMAND, the mobile phone You can end or reject a call even if you are not
searches for a network. in the Tel menu.
RPhone READY or the name of the network
Dialing a number from the phone book
provider: the mobile phone has found a
network and is ready to receive. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
RPhone No Service:
Service there is no network ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
available or the mobile phone is searching X Press the 9, : or a button to
for a network. switch to the phone book.
i You can obtain further information about
suitable mobile phones and connecting desired name.
mobile phones via Bluetooth: To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the
9 or : button for longer than one
Rfrom your authorized Mercedes-Benz second.
Center
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
Ron the Internet at http://
button or reach the end of the list.
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect X If only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing.
or
X If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION

number you want to dial. ASSIST (Y page 184)
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial- RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
ing. (Y page 184)
or
X If you do not want to make a call: press Displaying the assistance graphic
the ~ or % button. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
Redialing X Press 9 or : to select Assistance
The on-board computer saves the last names graphic.

graphic
or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the a button.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- The assistance graphic can display the status
ing wheel to select the Tel menu. of and information from other driving systems
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
or driving safety systems.
redial memory. The assistance graphic shows:
X Press the 9 or : button to select the Rthe symbol, when the rear window
desired name or number. wiper (Y page 109) is activated.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial- Rthe symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST
ing. (Y page 166) is deactivated.
or
X If you do not want to make a call: press Deactivating/activating ESP
the ~ or % button. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion in the description of ESP (Y page 67).
Assistance menu G WARNING

If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta-
Introduction bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri-
bed in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP in the fol-

lowing situations:
Rwhen using snow chains
Example: Assistance menu view options
Rin deep snow
In the DriveAssist menu, you have the fol- Ron sand or gravel
lowing options:
RDisplaying the assistance graphic
For further information about ESP, see
(Y page 66).
(Y page 183)
X Start the drive system.
RDeactivating/activating ESP
(Y page 183)
RActivating/deactivating the distance warn-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
ing system (Y page 184) X Press the 9 or : button to select
ESP.
ESP
Z
X Press the a button. X Press the a button.

The current selection is displayed. The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press the a X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again. button again.
ESP is deactivated if the warning When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up the symbol appears in the multifunc-
continuously when the drive system is run- tion display in the assistance graphics dis-
ning. play.
If the warning lamp and the warn- For further information about ATTENTION
ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP is not ASSIST, see (Y page 166).
available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
(Y page 221). Assist
Observe the information on display messages X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
(Y page 191). ing wheel to select the DriveAssist.
menu.
Activating/deactivating the distance X Press the 9 or : button to select
warning function Blind Spot Assist.
Assist
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the a button.
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. The current selection is displayed.
X Press 9 or : to select Distance X To activate/deactivate: press the a
Warning.
Warning button again.
X Press the a button. For further information about Blind Spot
The current selection is displayed. Assist, see (Y page 167).
X To activate/deactivate: press the a When the Blind Spot Assist Sensors
button again. Deactivated message is shown, the radar
If the distance warning function is activa- sensor system is deactivated.
ted, the multifunction display does not dis- X Switch on the radar sensor system
play a symbol. (Y page 188).
When the distance warning function is
deactivated, the symbol appears in
the multifunction display in the assistance Maintenance menu
graphics display.
Further information on the distance warning
function (Y page 64).
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Service menu view options
X Press the 9 or : button to select In the Serv. menu, you have the following
ATTENTION ASSIST.
ASSIST options:
RCalling up display messages in message X Press a to confirm.

memory (Y page 190) You will see the selected setting.
RChecking the tire pressure electronically X Press : or 9 to select A, B or C
(Y page 286) Change.
Change
RCalling up the service due date X Press = or ; to select Departure
(Y page 254) Time Hours.
Hours
X Press the 9 or : button to set the
hour.
Settings menu X Press = or ; to select Departure
Introduction Time Minutes.
Minutes
X Press 9 or : to set the minutes.
X Press a to confirm.
After changing from one menu to another,
the departure time setting is stored.
Selecting the departure time
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Example: settings menu view
X Press the 9 or : button on the steer-
In the Sett. menu, you have the following ing wheel to select the ECELL menu.
options:
X Press 9 or : to select Departure
RChanging the E-CELL settings
Time.
Time
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
RChanging the light settings
X Press the : or 9 button to select
RChanging the vehicle settings one of the three departure times or Timer
RRestoring the factory settings Off (no timer active).
ECELL menu
Charging with RANGE PLUS
Departure time If you have selected Park P, the on-board
In the ECELL menu you can choose to cool computer displays the expected battery
down or heat the vehicle interior for a prede- charge time or the RANGE PLUS condition of
fined departure time. charge for the departure time set.
If you have selected Park P, the on-board RANGE PLUS charges when:
computer displays the expected battery
Ryou have activated RANGE PLUS via the
charge time or the RANGE PLUS condition of
center console prior to charging and
charge for the departure time set.
Rthe high-voltage battery is fully charged.
Changing the departure time
If charging is not complete by departure time,
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- the maximum range will not be available.
X Press the 9 or : button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the ECELL menu.
X Press 9 or : to select Departure
Time.
Time
Z
If a departure time is selected, the yellow

indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary

heating button.
You can use the on-board computer to specify
up to three departure times in the E-CELL
submenu. One of the specified departure
times may be preselected (Y page 185).
Example:
Pre-entry climate control (via SmartKey)
RSet departure time: 6:41 a.m.
REnd time for standard high-voltage battery
Pre-entry climate control (via SmartKey) is
switched on temporarily when the vehicle is
charging: 6:00 a.m.
unlocked using the SmartKey. In order to
RRANGE PLUS condition of charge at
switch on pre-entry climate control via the
6:41 a.m.: 50% SmartKey, the function has to be activated
RThe maximum additional range is using the on-board computer.
decreased by 50 percent. Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate
Pre-entry climate control at time of depar- control (via SmartKey)
ture X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
If you activate the "Rem. Climate Control at ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
departure time" function, the vehicle interior X Use 9 or : to select the E-CELL
is heated or cooled prior to a desired depar- submenu.
ture time. X Press a to confirm.
i To heat or cool the vehicle interior for a X Press 9 or : to select Pre-Entry
desired departure time, the high-voltage Climate Cont. (Via Key). Key)
battery must be sufficiently charged. Acti- X Press a to activate or deactivate.
vate the climate control function primarily If pre-entry climate control (via SmartKey)
when the high-voltage battery is being is activated, pre-entry climate control (via
charged. You must also set a departure SmartKey) is switched on temporarily when
time using the E-CELL submenu you unlock the vehicle.
(Y page 185).
Switching "Pre-entry climate control at depar- Setting the maximum charge current
ture time" on/off Before charging the high-voltage battery,
check the maximum permissible charge cur-
rent for the relevant power socket.
You can set a maximum charge current in the
X Use 9 or : to select the E-CELL
ECELL menu.
submenu.
It is only necessary to select the maximum
charge current if there are no charge current
X Press 9 or : to select Rem. Cli
settings on the charging cable.
mate Control At Departure Time. Time
X Press a to activate or deactivate.
i The maximum charge current values in
The vehicle interior will then be heated or the on-board computer may deviate from
cooled prior to the predefined departure the charging cable values.
time.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the

Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func-
tion.
You will see the selected setting: km or
miles.
miles
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Example: changing the charge current The selected unit of measurement for dis-
: Setting the maximum charge current
tance applies to:
Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu
i This menu is not available in some coun-
Rthe odometer and the trip odometer
tries. In this case, the maximum charge
current for the power socket is limited to a Rthe trip computer
fixed level, depending on the country con- Rthe current consumption and the range
cerned. Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Rcruise control
ing wheel to select the Sett. menu. RASSYST PLUS service interval display
X Use 9 or : to select the E-CELL
Selecting the permanent display function
submenu.
You can determine whether the multifunction
Max. Charge Current.
Current display permanently shows your speed or the
outside temperature.
X Press 9 or : in the submenu to
select desired maximum charge cur- ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
rent :. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button on the multifunction

Instrument Cluster submenu.
steering wheel to confirm. X Press a to confirm.
The high-voltage battery is charged with X Press the : or 9 button to select the
the selected maximum charge current. Permanent Display: function.
You will see the selected setting: Outside
Instrument cluster Temperature or Speedometer [km/h].[km/h]
Selecting the display unit
You can determine whether the multifunction Lights
display shows some messages in miles or
kilometers. Switching the daytime running lamps on/
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- off
ing wheel to select the Sett menu. Canada only: daytime running lamps are
X Press the : or 9 button to select the required by law. You cannot set the Daytime
Instrument Cluster submenu. Running Lights function via the on-board
computer.
ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
Light submenu.
Z
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle

Daytime Running Lights function.

If the Daytime Running Lights function Activating/deactivating the automatic
has been switched on, the cone of light and door locking mechanism
the W symbol in the multifunction dis- X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
play are shown in orange. ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Further information on daytime running Vehicle submenu.

lamps (Y page 98). X Press a to confirm.
Setting the brightness of the ambient Automatic Door Lock function.
lighting When the Automatic Door Lock function
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed
ing wheel to select the Sett. menu. in orange in the multifunction display.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the a button to save the setting.
Light submenu.
If you activate the Automatic Door Lock
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
X Press the : or 9 button to select the a speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
Amb. Light +/- function. For further information on the automatic lock-
X Press the a button to change the set- ing feature, see (Y page 78).
tings.
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
brightness to a level from Off to Level 5
(bright). If you switch on the Acoustic Lock Feed
X Press the a or % button to save the
back function, an acoustic signal sounds
setting. when you lock the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating the interior lighting wheel to select the Sett. menu.
ing delayed switch-off X Press the : or 9 button to select the
If you activate the Interior Lighting Vehicle submenu.
Delay function, the interior lighting remains X Press a to confirm.
on for 20 seconds after you remove the key X Press the : or 9 button to select the
from the ignition lock.
Acoustic Lock function.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
ing wheel to select the Sett menu. the & symbol in the multifunction dis-
X Press the : or 9 button to select the play lights up orange.
Light submenu. X Press the a button to save the setting.
Activating/deactivating the radar sensor
system
Interior Lighting Delay function.
If the Interior Lighting Delay function X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
has been switched on, the vehicle interior is ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
displayed in orange in the multifunction X Press the : or 9 button to select the
display. Vehicle submenu.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press a to confirm.

Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.
Manual):
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
or Disabled
Disabled.
If the radar sensor system is switched off,

Blind Spot Assist is deactivated (Y page 167).
Restoring the factory settings

ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
Factory setting submenu.
The Reset All Settings? message
appears.
X Press the : or 9 button to select No
or Yes
Yes.
X Press a to confirm the selection.
If you have selected Yes
Yes, the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message.
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Lights function in the Light submenu is only
reset if the vehicle is stationary.
Z
190 Display messages
Display messages
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function
(Y page 154) and parking (Y page 144).
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-
play messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-
sages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call
up the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages,
Messages for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
Messages
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Display messages 191
Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP (Electronic Stability Pro-

gram), BAS (Brake Assist), RBS (Recuperative Brake System), the
Currently Unavail HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.
able See Opera
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.
tor's Manual
In addition, the , , and ! warning lamps light up
in the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative
braking may be either reduced or not effective. If you do not make
an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect
may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regen-
erative braking effect by applying the brake yourself.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,
making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph
(20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
! ABS, ESP, BAS, RBS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
not available due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
In addition, the J, , , and ! warning lamps
light up in the instrument cluster.
Z

G WARNING
increase.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ESP, BAS, RBS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are tem-
porarily unavailable.
Currently Unavail
able See Opera
tor's Manual In addition, the , and warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,
making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph
(20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
Z

ESP, BAS, RBS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not
available due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
In addition, the , and warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
G WARNING
increase.

T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP, BAS, RBS,
the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a
malfunction.
Inoperative See COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.
Operator's Manual In addition, the ,, and ! warning lamps in the
instrument cluster light up and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
increase.
RBS (Recuperative Brake System) is unavailable due to a malfunc-

tion.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual G WARNING
Braking efficiency may be impaired.
X Drive on taking extra care.
Z

F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic
only)!(Canada release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 145).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
Please Release X Release the electric parking brake manually.
Parking Brake
The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 145).
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only)!(Canada To apply:
only)
Parking Brake See
Operator's Manual X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least 10 seconds.
X Shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to P.
The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only)/!

(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 145).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Do not drive on.

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
To release:
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 300).
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA

only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about
10 seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
released. It then goes out or remains lit.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 145).
Z

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only)/!
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to
apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the transmission to P.
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA
only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about
only)!(Canada 10 seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
only) released. It then goes out or remains lit.
Parking Brake Inop The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
erative voltage or undervoltage.
X Rectify the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the drive system.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking

brake:
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

The display message is only shown while the vehicle is in motion.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA
only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-
only) tion was switched off.
Turn On the Igni X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
tion to Release
the Parking Brake

$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning
only)J(Canada lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
only) sounds.
Check Brake Fluid G WARNING
Level
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Check Brake Pad
Wear
G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc-

tioning.
Inoperative
X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified
Z

PRE-SAFE Adaptive Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes

Functions Cur are:
rently Limited See Rthe front bumper is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Clean the front bumper (Y page 259).
X Start the drive system again.
PRE-SAFE Adaptive Brake Assist is faulty. The distance warning signal may
Functions Limited also have failed.
See Operator's Man X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ual
6 The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights

up in the instrument cluster.
SRS Malfunction
Service Required G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Further information on occupant safety (Y page 40).


6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or
right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
Front Left Malfunc ter.
tion Service
Required or Front G WARNING
Right Malfunction The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
Service Required gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or

right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
Rear Left Malfunc ter.
tion Service
Required or Rear G WARNING
Right Malfunction The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
Service Required gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear center. The

6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Center Mal
function Service G WARNING
Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-

tain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
Left Side Curtain cluster.
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required G WARNING
or Right Side Cur The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered
tain Airbag Mal unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-
function Service gered.
Required There is an increased risk of injury.
Z

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, even
Airbag Disabled though:
See Operator's Man Ran adult
ual
or
Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-
passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-
pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the fol-
lowing:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-
passenger air bag (Y page 49).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper
ator's Manual display messages must not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.

For further information about the Occupant Classification System,
see (Y page 49).
Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even
Airbag Enabled See though:
Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-
tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional
weight on the seat.
G WARNING
The air bag may deploy unintentionally.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the fol-
lowing:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classifi-
cation System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag
(Y page 49).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper
ator's Manual display messages must appear in the multi-
function display.
Z

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-

tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System,

see (Y page 49).
Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left Corner
(Y page 102).
ing Light or Check
Right Cornering or
Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

Check Left Low
(Y page 102).
Beam or Check
Right Low Beam or
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Rear Left
(Y page 102).
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.
Check Front Left
(Y page 102).
Turn Signal or
Check Front Left or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

defective.
Check Left Mirror
Turn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal
b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

Check Center Brake
Lamp
b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Brake
(Y page 102).
Lamp or Check
Right Brake Lamp or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
(Y page 102).
and Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail or
and Brake Lamps X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

Check Left High
(Y page 102).
Beam or Check
Right High Beam or
b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.

License Plate Lamp
(Y page 102).
or
Z

b The rear fog lamp is faulty.

Rear Fog Lamp
(Y page 102).
or
b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
(Y page 102).
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right or
Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The backup lamp is defective.

Backup Light
(Y page 102).
or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
(Y page 102).
Lamp or Check
Right Tail Lamp or
b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.

Check Rear Left
(Y page 102).
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Rear Right or
Sidemarker Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

Check Left Daytime
(Y page 102).
Running Light or
Check Right Day or
time Running Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The exterior lighting is defective.
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
b The light sensor is defective.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights
X Turn the light switch to .
Drive system
# The 12 V battery is no longer being charged.

X Do not drive on.
X Do not tow the vehicle.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions.
+ The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
Level See Opera cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
tor's Manual X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the
cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
High-voltage battery
Battery Reserve The charge level of the high-voltage battery has dropped into the
Level reserve range.
X Charge the high-voltage battery.
The charge level of the high-voltage battery is so low that it is no

longer possible to drive the vehicle.
Battery Level Too
X Park the vehicle and charge the high-voltage battery.
Low, Stop, Charge
Immediately
There are malfunctions in the drive system and/or the cooling

system.
Malfunction Visit
X Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Workshop
Without starting There is a malfunction in the high-voltage electrical system. A

engine again, con warning tone also sounds.
sult workshop X Do not switch off the drive system.
X Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
There is a serious malfunction in the drive system. A warning tone

also sounds.
Stop Switch Engine
Off
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
X Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Driving systems
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue

or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
Attention Assist: also sounds.
Take a Break!
X If necessary, take a break.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow your-

self to rest.
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Attention Assist
Inoperative

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 154).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 154).
Radar Sensors Deac The radar sensor system is deactivated.

tivated See Opera X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 188).
tor's Manual
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Currently Unavail Rthe sensors are dirty.
able See Opera Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
tor's Manual
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
rors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Clean the sensors (Y page 259).
X Start the drive system again.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is defective.

Inoperative The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
rors.
Z

Park Assist Can The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been
celed fastened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel

while steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi-
function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP has intervened.

X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 159).
Park Assist Inoper You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
ative maneuvers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after approx-
imately 10(Y page 159).
X Switch off the drive system and start it again.

PARKTRONIC is defective.
Cruise Control Cruise control is faulty.

Inoperative A warning tone also sounds.
Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 153).
Tires

Check The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
Tires The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 264).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pres-
sure.
X
Warning The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
Tire Malfunction wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
Z

Tire Press. Monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
Currently Unavail from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily
able malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.
TirePress. There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
Sensor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
multifunction display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Mon The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
itor The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
Inoperative No X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
Wheel Sensors The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Please Correct The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 284).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 287).
Vehicle

Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
to Start Engine position R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Depress Brake to You have attempted to start the drive system with the transmis-
Start Engine sion in position N without depressing the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N, You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or D
Depress Brake and without starting the drive system.
Start Engine X Start the drive system.
i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to

the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then
can the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the
brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the
parking lock remains engaged.
Apply Brake to You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
Shift from 'P' position R, N or D without depressing the brake pedal.
Transmission Not G WARNING

in P
The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or
Risk of Vehicle D.
Rolling Away
Service Required You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Do Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
Only Shift The vehicle is moving.

to 'P' when Vehi X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
cle is Stationary attention to road and traffic conditions.
Reversing Not Pos The transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot back up.
sible Service X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Required
A The tailgate is open.

X Close the tailgate.
Z

? The hood is not closed properly.

G WARNING
If the hood is not closed properly it may open and block your view
when the vehicle is in motion.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.
Power assistance for steering is malfunctioning

Power Steering Mal
function See Oper G WARNING
ator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid
i If you do not mix antifreeze with the washer fluid in the winter
months, then the washer fluid could freeze in the washer fluid
reservoir. In this case, the Check Washer Fluid display mes-
sage may appear in the multifunction display.
X Add washer fluid (Y page 254).
Wiper Malfunction The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.

ing X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty.
Flashers Malfunc X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tioning
Charger Cable Con The charging cable is still connected to the vehicle socket.
nected X Remove the charging cable from vehicle socket.
SmartKey
+ The SmartKey batteries are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 74).
Replace Key Battery
+ The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds.

When you switch off the ignition, you will be unable to start the
Key Not Detected vehicle.
(red display message)
X Locate the SmartKey.
The SmartKey is not detected while driving because a powerful

radio transmitter is causing interference. A warning tone also
sounds.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position (Y page 127).
+ You are in the vehicle and the SmartKey currently cannot be

detected by the vehicle.
Key Not Detected
X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
(white display mes-
sage) If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position (Y page 127).
+ The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key
+ You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle
Z
216 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

+ At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
Close Doors to
Lock Vehicle
+ The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.
Take Your Key
from Ignition
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Seat belts

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
After starting the drive to fasten their seat belts.
system, the red warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42).
ing lamp lights up for
6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the drive X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42).
system, the red seat The warning tone ceases.
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a warn-
ing tone sounds for up
to 6 seconds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
After you have started X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42).
the drive system, the The warning lamp goes out.
red seat belt warning
lamp comes on as soon There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
as the driver's door or X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
the front-passenger them in a secure place.
door is closed. The warning lamp goes out.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 217

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The
The red seat belt warn- vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly
ing lamp flashes and an been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42).
warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being

driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
Z
Safety systems

$ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
J (Canada only) G WARNING
The red brake system
The braking effect may be impaired.
warning lamp is lit while
the drive system is run- There is a risk of an accident.
ning. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal-
function.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc-

The yellow ABS and tion. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISION PREVENTION
RBS warning lamps are ASSIST, ESP (Electronic Stability Program), RBS, the HOLD func-
on while the drive sys- tion and hill start assist are also deactivated, for example.
tem is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
increase.
display.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems may also

not be available, e.g. the navigation system.

! ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION
The yellow ABS and ASSIST, ESP, EBD (electronic brake force distribution), the HOLD
RBS warning lamps are function and hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for
on while the drive sys- example.
tem is running. Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosisis not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.
Z

! EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, COLLISION PREVEN-

The yellow ABS and TION ASSIST, ESP, RBS, the HOLD function and hill start assist
RBS warning lamps are are unavailable, for example.
on while the drive sys- ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
tem is running. A warn-
ing tone also sounds. G WARNING
increase.
display.

$ (USA only) ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, RBS, COLLI-
J (Canada only) SION PREVENTION ASSIST, EBD, the HOLD function and hill start
! assist are also unavailable, for example.
The red brake warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
lamp, the yellow ESP G WARNING
and ESP OFF warning
lamps, the yellow ABS
and RBS warning lamps
are lit while the drive
system is running.
increase.
display.
ESP or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of

The yellow ESP warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
ing lamp flashes while Cruise control is deactivated.
the vehicle is in motion. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 67).
Z

G WARNING
The yellow ESP OFF If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
warning lamp is lit while
the drive system is run-
ning. X Reactivate ESP.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 67).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP cannot be activated:

X Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
ESP, RBS, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD

The yellow RBS, ESP function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.
and ESP OFF warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
lamps are lit while the
G WARNING
increase.
display.

ESP, RBS, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are tem-
The yellow RBS, ESP porarily unavailable.
and ESP OFF warning COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.
lamps are lit while the ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
drive system is running. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNING
increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.
F (USA only) X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

! (Canada only) display.
The red indicator lamp
for the electric parking
brake flashes or lights
up and/or the yellow
warning lamp for the
electric parking brake
lights up.
Z

6 The restraint system is faulty.

The red restraint sys- G WARNING
tem warning lamp is lit
while the drive system The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
is running. gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
For further information about the restraint system, see
(Y page 40).
RBS (Recuperative Brake System) is unavailable due to a malfunc-

The yellow RBS warning tion.
lamp is lit while the G WARNING
Braking efficiency may be impaired.
X Drive on taking extra care.
Drive system

The yellow bat- The charge level of the high-voltage battery has dropped into the
tery charge reserve range.
warning lamp X Charge the high-voltage battery.
is on.
Driving systems

The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed
The red distance warn- selected.
ing lamp lights up while X Increase the distance.
the vehicle is in motion.
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line
The red distance warn- of travel at too high a speed.
ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately.
the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
A warning tone also brake or take evasive action.
sounds.
For further information about the distance warning function of
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (Y page 64).
Z
Tires

h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires.
monitor warning lamp G WARNING
(pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit. With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
display.
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 284).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
h The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

The yellow tire pressure G WARNING
monitor warning lamp
(pressure loss/ The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire
malfunction) flashes for pressure.
approximately one There is a risk of an accident.
minute and then X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
remains lit. display.
227

Loading guidelines ............................ 228
Stowage areas .................................. 228
Features ............................................. 234
Stowage and features

228 Stowage areas
Useful information RAlways place the load against the rear or

front seat backrests. Make sure that the
i This Operator's Manual describes all seat backrests are securely locked into
models and all standard and optional equip- place.
ment of your vehicle available at the time of RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
publication of the Operator's Manual. seats if possible.
Country-specific differences are possible. RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel
Bear in mind that your vehicle may not fea- nets to transport loads and luggage.
ture all functions described here. This also RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening
applies to safety-relevant systems and materials appropriate for the weight and
functions. size of the load.
i Read the information on qualified special- RHook in the cargo net when loading.
ist workshops: (Y page 24). RThe maximum load capacity of the stowage
well under the cargo compartment floor is
55 lbs (25 kg).
Loading guidelines RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges
G WARNING for protection.
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
! Do not position the load on one part of the
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
folding cargo compartment floor only. The
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
maximum load capacity of the folding cargo
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
compartment floor is 220 lbs (100 kg). Dis-
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
tribute the weight evenly to avoid damaging
den change in direction.
the cargo compartment floor. Place a solid
Always store objects so that they cannot be board under the load if necessary. Please
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or note that the load on the cargo compart-
loads against slipping or tipping before the ment floor will be increased when the load
journey. is lashed down.
The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-
cle are dependent on the distribution of the
Stowage areas
load within the vehicle. Observe the following
notes when transporting a load: Stowage spaces
Rnever exceed the maximum permissible Important safety notes
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight
rating for the vehicle (including occupants). G WARNING
The values are specified on the vehicle If objects in the passenger compartment are
identification plate on the B-pillar of the stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
driver's door. thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
RThe cargo compartment is the preferred There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
place to carry objects. event of sudden braking or a sudden change
RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos- in direction.
sible and as low down in the cargo com-
partment as possible.
RThe load must not protrude above the
upper edge of the seat backrests.
Stowage areas 229
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be Stowage compartment in front of the arm-
thrown around in such situations. rest
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too

large in the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 228).

Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever
Stowage compartments in the front
X To open: press the marking on cover :.
Glove box
i You can remove the non-slip mat and the
insert for cleaning. When removing the
insert you will have to overcome some
slight resistance.
Stowage compartment/telephone com-
partment under the armrest
X To open: pull handle : and open glove box

flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
until it engages.
i There is a pen holder at the top of the
glove box flap. X To open: on vehicles with moveable armr-
ests, make sure that the armrest is in the
rearmost position.
X Press button : and fold the armrest up.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a

USB connection and an AUX IN connection
or a Media Interface are installed in the
stowage compartment. A Media Interface
is a universal interface for portable audio
equipment, e.g. for an iPod or MP3 player
(see the separate Audio or COMAND Oper-
ating Instructions).
Z
230 Stowage areas
Stowage compartment under the driver's X To open: pull down the top of stowage
seat and front-passenger seat compartment : by the edge of the handle.
G WARNING i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
If you exceed the maximum load for the stow- there may be an open stowage space above
age compartment, the cover may not be able the stowage compartment.
to restrain the items. Items may be thrown out
of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- Stowage nets
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction. Stowage nets are located in the front-

passenger footwell and on the back of the
Never exceed the maximum permissible load
driver's and the front-passenger seat.
for the stowage compartment. Stow and
secure heavy objects in the cargo compart- Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 228)
ment. and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 228).
The maximum permissible load of the stow-
age compartment is 2.6 lbs (1.2 kg).
Cargo compartment enlargement
G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
X To open: pull handle : up and fold seat belt can no longer offer the intended
cover ; forwards. level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
Stowage space in the rear RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-
partment cannot be restrained by the seat
Stowage compartment in the rear center backrest.
console
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
! Before folding the backrest in the rear

compartment forwards, make sure that the
rear compartment armrest and the
cupholder are folded in. They may other-
wise be damaged.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 228).
Stowage areas 231
Cargo compartment enlargement with- backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-

out EASY-VARIO-PLUS system aged.
Folding the rear seat backrest forward X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr- visible.
ests can be folded forwards separately to
increase the cargo compartment capacity. X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 90).
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat

back if necessary.
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings
Observe the following notes on securing
loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines
X Fully insert the backrest head restraints (Y page 228).
(Y page 90).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
forward if necessary.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
X Pull left-hand or right-hand release han-
rings evenly.
dle ; of the seat backrest forwards.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
Corresponding seat backrest : is
a load, as these are only intended as an
released.
anti-slip protection for light loads.
X Fold backrest : forwards.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
or corners.
back if necessary.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
Folding the rear seat backrest back
: Cargo tie-down rings

forward if necessary.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
Z
232 Stowage areas
Bag hook ! When loading the vehicle, make sure that

you do not stack the load in the cargo com-
G WARNING partment higher than the lower edge of the
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects side windows. Do not place heavy objects
or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug- on top of the cargo compartment cover.
gage could be flung around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly ! When removing and installing the cargo
changing directions. There is a risk of injury. compartment cover, ensure that its end
caps do not scrape the light-colored parts
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
of the vehicle.
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile

objects on the bag hooks. The cargo compartment cover is located
behind the rear bench seat backrest.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of
6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to Extending/retracting the cargo com-
secure a load. partment cover
: Bag hook
X To extend: pull the cargo compartment
cover back by grab handle : and clip it into
retainers ; on the left and right.
Cargo compartment cover
X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment
Important safety notes cover from retainers ; on the left and right
and guide it forwards by grab handle :
G WARNING until it is fully retracted.
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
changes in direction, braking or in the event of
an accident. There is an increased risk of
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo compartment cover.
Stowage areas 233
Installing/removing the cargo compart- ! The maximum load capacity of the stow-
ment cover age well under the cargo compartment
floor is 55 lbs (25 kg).
Opening/closing the cargo compart-

ment floor
Under the trunk floor you can find a folding
box.

X To remove: make sure that the cargo com-
partment cover is rolled up.
X Push in the end cap of cargo compartment
cover : in the direction of the arrow on the
right or left side using grip =.
X Push cargo compartment cover : into
opposite anchorage ;. X To open: open the tailgate.
X Remove cargo compartment cover : X Holding ribbing ;, press handle : down-
upwards. wards.
X To install: set cargo compartment Handle : folds up.
cover : on the right or left-hand side in X Swing the cargo compartment floor
anchorage ;. upwards using handle : until it rests
X Push in the opposite end cap of cargo com-
against the cargo compartment cover.
partment cover : in the direction of the
arrow and insert cargo compartment
cover : into opposite anchorage ;.
Stowage well under the cargo com-

partment floor
G WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
X Fold out hook = on the underside of the
is open, objects could be flung around, thus
cargo compartment floor.
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always close the cargo compartment floor
before a journey.
Z
234 Features
X To raise: using handle :, lift up cargo

compartment floor ; in the direction of
arrow = and pull it upwards.
X Lower cargo compartment floor ; again.
To do this, push the trunk floor away so that
it engages in the guide on the upper level.
Cargo compartment floor ; engages in
the upper position.
i Carry out this step using both hands.
X To lower: raise cargo compartment

X Attach hook = to the cargo compart- floor ; slightly using handle : and pull it
ment's upper seal ?. towards you.
X Lower cargo compartment floor ; again
X To close: detach hook = from seal ?.
slowly. Whilst doing so, press the trunk
X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the
floor into the lower level.
underside of the cargo compartment floor. Cargo compartment floor ; engages in
X Fold the trunk floor down. the lower position.
X Press the cargo compartment floor down
until it engages.
Features
Setting the height of the cargo compart- Cup holder
ment floor
The stowage well under the cargo compart-
ment floor can be increased or decreased in G WARNING
size as necessary. To do this, you can lock the
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
floor at two different heights. The upper catch
whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst
gives a flat load surface when the rear bench
traveling, the container may be flung around
seat is folded forward.
and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu-
pants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may
be distracted from the traffic conditions and
you could lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident and injury.
Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is
stationary. Only use the cup holder for con-
tainers of the right size. Always close the con-
tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.
G WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
Features 235
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be

thrown around in such situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too

large in the cargo compartment.
X To install: insert cup holder into lateral
! Only use the cup holders for containers of curved sections ; in the stowage com-
the right size and which have lids. The
partment. Insert the cup holder so that the
drinks could otherwise spill.
wedge of the upper section of cup
The stowage compartments in the doors pro- holder : faces forwards.
vide space for bottles: X Press the cup holder downwards until it
Rfront: capacity up to 51 fl. oz. (1.5 l) engages on the right and left-hand sides.
Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l)
Cup holder in the front-compartment Sun visors

center console Overview
The cup holder and the rubber mat under-
neath can be removed for cleaning. Clean G WARNING
them with clean, lukewarm water only. If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
X To remove: carefully pull in upper sections

of cup holder : on the driver's and front-
passenger sides until they release.
X Lift the cup holder upwards ; until it can
be removed.
: Mirror light
; Bracket
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
Z
236 Features
? Vanity mirror i If you remove the ashtray insert, you can

A Mirror cover use the resulting compartment for stow-
age.
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Rear-compartment ashtray
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A
has been folded up.
Glare from the side

X Fold down the sun visor.

X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
X Vehicles with mirror lights: slide the sun
visor horizontally as desired.
X To open: pull cover = out by its top edge.
X To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in
Ashtray the direction of arrow ? until it audibly
Front ashtray releases.
X Lift insert ; up and out.
! The stowage space under the ashtray is X To install the insert: install insert ; from
not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-
above into the holder and press down until
rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the
it engages.
ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the
stowage space could be damaged.
Cigarette lighter
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowage There is a risk of fire and injury.
compartment
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
X To open: push the lower section of Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
cover :. out of reach of children. Never leave children
The stowage compartment opens. unsupervised in the vehicle.
X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ;
and out. Your attention must always be focused on the
X To re-install the insert: press insert = traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
into the holder until it engages.
Features 237
lighter when road and traffic conditions per- Socket in the rear-compartment center
mit. console

Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowage X Pull cover : out by its top edge.
compartment
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
Socket in the cargo compartment
X To open: push the lower section of
cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
12 V sockets
General notes
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- X Lift up the cover of socket :.
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso- mbrace
ries include such items as bulbs or chargers
for mobile phones. General notes
If the sockets are used for a very long time the You must have a license agreement to acti-
battery may discharge. vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your
i An emergency cut-out ensures that the system is activated and operational. To log in,
on-board voltage does not drop too low. If press the MB Info call button. If any of
the on-board voltage is too low, the power the steps mentioned are not carried out, the
to the sockets is automatically cut. system may not be activated.
If you have questions about the activation,
contact the following telephone assistance
service:
Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367
Z
238 Features
Shortly after successfully registering with the RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the
service, a user ID and password will be sent to following buttons continues to light up red
you by post. after the system self-diagnosis:
The system is available if: - SOS button
Rit has been activated and is operational - F Roadside Assistance call button
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is - MB Info call button

available for transmitting data to the Cus- RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inop
tomer Center erative or Service Not Activated
Ra service subscription is available message appears in the multifunction dis-
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged play.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
i Determining the location of the vehicle on above, the system may not operate as expec-
a map is only possible if: ted. In the event of an emergency, help will
RGPS reception is available. have to be summoned by other means.
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to Have the system checked at the nearest
the Customer Assistance Center. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call the
following telephone assistance service:
The mbrace system Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
follows: Emergency call
X Press the W or X button on the mul- Important safety notes
tifunction steering wheel.
G WARNING
or It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
X Use the volume controller of the audio sys- even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
tem/COMAND. emergency if:
The system offers various services, e.g.: Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
RAutomatic and manual emergency call cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
RRoadside Assistance call Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
RMB Info call road
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
System self-test seen by other road users, particularly when
dark or in poor visibility conditions
After you have switched on the ignition, the There is a risk of an accident and injury.
system carries out a self-diagnosis.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-
A malfunction in the system has been detec- lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
ted if one of the following occurs: Move to a safe location along with other vehi-
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does cle occupants. In such situations, secure the
not come on during the system self-test. vehicle in accordance with national regula-
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.
Assistance button does not light up during
self-diagnosis of the system. You must have a license agreement to acti-
RThe indicator lamp in the MB Info call
vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your
system is activated and operational. To reg-
button does not light up during self-diag-
ister, press the MB Info call button. If
nosis of the system.
Features 239
any of the steps mentioned are not carried If, for example, the relevant mobile phone
out, the system may not be activated. network is not available then voice connec-
If you have questions about the activation, tion cannot be established. The indicator
contact the following telephone assistance lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously.
service: The Call Failed message appears in the
Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 multifunction display and must be confirmed.
In this case, summon assistance by other
General notes means.
The emergency call is triggered automatically

if an air bag is deployed or an Emergency Making an emergency call
Tensioning Device is triggered.
i You cannot end an automatically trig-
gered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually.
As soon as the emergency call has been ini-
tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The multifunction display shows the
Connecting Call message.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the X To initiate an emergency call manually:
Call Connected message appears in the press cover : briefly to open.
multifunction display. X Press SOS button ; briefly.
All important information on the emergency is The indicator lamp in SOS button ;
transmitted, for example: flashes until the emergency call is conclu-
ded.
Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter-
X Wait for a voice connection to the
mined by the GPS system)
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
Rvehicle identification number
ter.
Rinformation on the severity of the accident
X After the emergency call, close cover :.
After the emergency call has been initiated, a
voice connection is automatically established i If the mobile phone network is unavaila-
between the Customer Assistance Center ble, mbrace will not be able to make the
and the vehicle occupants. emergency call. If you leave the vehicle
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the immediately after pressing the SOS button,
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- you will not know whether mbrace placed
ter attempts to get more information on the the emergency call. In this case, always
emergency. summon assistance by other means.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle
occupants, an ambulance is immediately
sent to the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center, the system has been unable to initiate
an emergency call.
Z
240 Features
Roadside Assistance button Benz technician or makes arrangements for

your vehicle to be transported to the nearest
You may be charged for services such as
repair work and/or towing.
Further details are available in your mbrace
manual.
i If the system has not been able to initiate
a Roadside Assistance call:
Rthe indicator lamp in Roadside Assis-

tance call button : flashes continuously
X Press Roadside Assistance button :. Rit was not possible to establish a voice
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz connection to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
Customer Assistance Center. tomer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
button : flashes while the call is active. network is not available, for example.
The multifunction display shows the Con The Call Failed message appears in the
necting Call message. The audio output multifunction display.
is muted. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
If a connection can be made, the Call Con multifunction steering wheel.
nected message appears in the multifunction or
display.
X Press the corresponding button for ending
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception a phone call on the audio system or on
are available, the system transfers data to the COMAND.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
MB Info call button
Rcurrent location of the vehicle
Rvehicle identification number
i The audio system or COMAND display

indicates that a call is active. During the
call, you can change to the navigation menu
by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,
for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
X Press MB Info call button :.
From the remote fault diagnosis, the This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center Customer Assistance Center.
can ascertain the nature of the problem
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
(Y page 243).
flashes while the connection is being made.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance The multifunction display shows the Con
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-
Features 241
necting Call message. The audio system Call priority

is muted.
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
If a connection can be made, the Call Con Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
nected message appears in the multifunction call can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-
display. gency call will take priority and override all
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception other active calls.
are available, the system transfers data to the The indicator lamp of the respective button
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, flashes until the call is ended.
for example: An emergency call can only be terminated by

Rcurrent location of the vehicle the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Rvehicle identification number Center.
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
i The audio system or COMAND display
indicates that a call is active. During the Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steer-
call, you can change to the navigation menu ing wheel
by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, Rthe corresponding button on the audio sys-
for example. tem or on COMAND for ending a telephone
Voice output is not available. call
A voice connection is established between i When a call is initiated, the audio system
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
Center and the vehicle occupants. connected to COMAND. However, if you
You receive information about operating your want to use your mobile phone, do so only
vehicle, about the nearest authorized when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod- location.
ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.
Downloading destinations in COMAND
i The system has not been able to initiate
an MB Info call, if: Downloading destinations
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call but- i The Destination Download function is
ton : is flashing continuously. only possible when:
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
Rthe relevant mobile phone network is
Benz Customer Assistance Center was available and data transfer is possible.
established.
Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone system.
network is not available, for example.
Downloading destinations gives you access
The Call Failed message appears in the
to a database with over 15 million points of
interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the the navigation system in your vehicle. If you
multifunction steering wheel. know the destination, the address can be
or downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain
X Press the corresponding button for ending information on the location of points of inter-
a phone call on the audio system or on est (POIs)/important destinations in the
COMAND. vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with
up to 20 way points.
Z
242 Features
You are prompted to confirm route guidance i Example:

to the address entered. If you select "Send to vehicle" and then
The system calculates the route and subse- "Mercedes-Benz", the destination address
quently starts the route guidance with the will be sent to your vehicle.
address entered. X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
i If you select No
No, the address can be saved Enter the e-mail address you specified
in the address book. when setting up your mbrace account into
the corresponding field.
Route Assistance
X Click "Send".
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-
age and cannot be purchased separately. i Information on specific commands such
i You can use the route assistance function as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found
even if the vehicle is not equipped with a on the website.
navigation system. Calling up destination addresses
Within the framework of this service, you X Switch on the ignition.
receive a professional and reliable form of The destination address is loaded into the
navigation support without having to leave vehicle's navigation system.
your vehicle. A display message appears, asking
The customer service representative finds a whether navigation should be started.
suitable route depending on your vehicle's X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY
current position and the desired destination. the COMAND controller and press W to
You will then be guided live through the cur- confirm.
rent route section. The system calculates the route and sub-
sequently starts the route guidance with
Search & Send the address entered.
General notes i If you select No
No, the address can be saved
i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle in the address book.
must be equipped with mbrace and a navi- i If you have sent more than one destina-
gation system. Additionally, an mbrace ser- tion address, each individual destination
vice subscription must be completed. must be confirmed separately.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-
i Destination addresses are loaded in the
vice. A destination address which is found on
same order as the order in which they were
Google Maps can be transferred via mbrace sent.
directly to your vehicle's navigation system.
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehi-
Specifying and sending the destination cles with mbrace and activated mbrace
address accounts:
X Go to the website http:// If multiple vehicles are registered under the
www.maps.google.com and enter a desti- same e-mail address, the destination will
nation address into the entry field. be sent to all the vehicles.
X To send the destination address to the
e-mail address of your mbrace account:
click on the corresponding button on the
website.
Features 243
Vehicle remote opening To do this, you will need your identification

number and password.
You can use vehicle remote unlocking if you
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and i The vehicle valet locking feature is only
a replacement key is not available. available when the relevant mobile phone
The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- network is accessible and a data connec-
Benz Customer Assistance Center. tion is possible.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely
unlocked within 4 days of the ignition being Stolen vehicle recovery service
turned off. After this time, the remote unlock-

If your vehicle has been stolen:
ing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened
X Notify the police.
remotely. The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
X Contact the following telephone assistance
X This number will be forwarded to the
service:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 ter together with your PIN.
You will be asked for your password. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed Center then tries to locate the system. The
upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
Assistance Center. ter contacts you and the local law enforce-
To do this, you will need your identification ment agency if the vehicle is located.
number and password. However, only the law enforcement agency
is informed of the location of the vehicle.
i Vehicle remote unlocking is only possible
if the relevant mobile phone network is i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated
accessible. for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center is auto-
Vehicle remote closing matically notified.
The remote closing feature can be used when
you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis
are no longer nearby. With the remote fault diagnosis (Vehicle
The vehicle can then be locked by the Health Check), the Customer Assistance Cen-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. ter can provide improved support for prob-
The vehicle can be immediately remotely lems with your vehicle. During an existing call,
locked within 4 days of the ignition being vehicle data is transferred to the Customer
turned off. After this time, remote closing may Assistance Center. The customer service rep-
be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days resentative can use the received data to
the vehicle can no longer be locked remotely. decide what kind of assistance is required.
You are then, for example, guided to the near-
X Contact the following telephone assistance
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or a
service:
recovery vehicle is called.
Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367
Vehicle data transfer during an MB Info call or
You will be asked for your password.
Roadside Assistance call is initiated by the
The next time you are inside the vehicle and Customer Assistance Center. You will see the
you switch on the ignition, the Doors Roadside Assistance Connected mes-
Locked Remotely message appears in the sage in the COMAND display. If the vehicle
Z
244 Features
remote fault diagnosis can be started, the Information on the data stored in the vehicle
Request for vehicle diagnosis (Y page 26).
received. Start vehicle diagnosis? Information on Roadside Assistance
message appears in the display. (Y page 21).
X Confirm the message with YesYes.
X When the Vehicle diagnosis: Please Downloading routes
start ignition message appears, turn Downloading routes allows you to transfer
the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and save predefined routes in the navigation
(Y page 127). system. To do this, an SD memory card must
X When the Please follow the instruc be inserted into the COMAND system. If no
tions received by phone and move SD memory card is inserted, you must insert
your vehicle to a safe position the card into the card slot on the COMAND
message appears, follow the customer ser- system before saving.
vice representative's instructions. A route can be prepared and sent either by a
The message in the display disappears. customer service representative or via the
If you select Cancel the remote fault diag- mbrace portal on the Internet.
nosis is canceled completely. Each route can include up to 20 way points.
The vehicle operating state check begins. Once a route has been received by the navi-
You will see the Vehicle diagnosis gation system, you will see the <route
activated. message. name> has been saved to memory card.
When the diagnosis is completed, the Send Do you want to start route guidance?
vehicle diagnostics data (Voice con message in the COMAND display. The route is
nection may be interrupted during saved to the SD memory card.
data transfer) message appears. The X To start route guidance: select YesYes.
vehicle data can now be sent to the Customer An overview of the route is shown in the
Assistance center. display.
X Press OK to confirm the message. i If you select No
No, the saved route can be
The voice connection with the Customer called up later via the navigation menu.
Assistance Center is terminated. X Select Start
Start.
You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis: Route guidance is started.
Transferring data... message.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer i Downloaded and saved data can be called
Assistance Center. up again in COMAND.
You can find further information in the sep-
Depending on what the customer service rep-
arate COMAND Operating Instructions.
resentative agreed with you, the voice con-
nection is re-established after the transfer is
Speed alert
complete. If necessary, you will be contacted
at a later time by another means, e.g. by e- You can define the upper speed limit, which
mail or phone. must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
Another function of the remote fault diagno- If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi-
sis is the transfer of service data to the Cus- cle, a message will be sent to the Customer
tomer Assistance Center. If a service is over- Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance
due, the COMAND display shows a message Center then forwards this information to you.
about various special offers at your work- You can select the way in which you receive
shop. this information beforehand. Possible options
Features 245
include text message, e-mail or an automated Garage door opener

call.
The data you receive contains the following Important safety notes
information: G WARNING
Rthe location where the speed limit was When you operate or program the garage door
exceeded with the integrated garage door opener, per-
Rthe time at which the speed limit was sons in the range of movement of the garage
exceeded door can become trapped or struck by the
Rthe selected speed limit which was excee- garage door. There is a risk of injury.

ded When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
Geo fencing within the range of movement of the garage
door.
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
be informed if the vehicle crosses the boun- Programming
daries of the selected areas. You can select Programming buttons
the way in which you receive this information
beforehand. Possible options include text Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
message, e-mail or an automated call. (Y page 245).
The area can be determined as either a circle
or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
You can specify up to ten areas simultane-
ously. Different settings are possible for each
area.
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call
and inform the customer service representa-
tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by
text message.
Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mir-
Triggering the vehicle alarm ror
With this function, you can trigger the vehi- Garage door remote control A is not part of
cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm the integrated garage door opener.
sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. X Before programing for the first time, clear
Depending on the setting, the panic alarm the integrated garage door opener memory
lasts 5 or 10 seconds. Afterwards, the alarm (Y page 248).
switches off. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X Press and hold button ;, = or ? of the
integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow.
i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
as button ;, = or ? is programmed for
Z
246 Features
the first time. If the selected button has

already been programmed, indicator
lamp : lights up yellow after 10 seconds
have elapsed.
X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
X Point garage door remote control A
towards buttons ;, = or ? on the rear-
view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5
to 20 cm).
i The required distance between remote Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mir-
control A and the integrated garage door ror
opener depends on the garage door drive Your vehicle must be within reach of the
system. Several attempts might be neces- garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure
sary. You should test every position for at that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
least 25 seconds before trying another objects are present within the sweep of the
position. door or gate.
X Press and hold button B on remote control X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
A until indicator lamp : lights up green. tion lock.
If indicator lamp : lights up green or X Press the programing button of the door or
flashes, then programing was successful. gate drive (see the door or gate drive oper-
X Release button B of remote control A of ating instructions, e.g. under "Programing
the garage door drive. additional remote controls").
X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the i Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-
programing procedure for the correspond- tiate the next step.
ing button on the rear-view mirror. When X Press previously programmed button ;,
doing so, vary the distance between remote
= or ? of the integrated garage door
control A and the rear-view mirror.
opener until the door closes.
i If the indicator lamp flashes green after The rolling code synchronization is then
successful programing, the garage door complete.
system is using a rolling code. After pro-
Notes on programming the remote con-
graming, you must synchronize the garage
trol
door opener integrated in the rear-view mir-
ror with the receiver of the garage door Canadian radio frequency laws require a
system. "break" (or interruption) of the transmission
signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
Synchronizing the rolling code Therefore, these signals may not last long
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" enough for the integrated garage door
(Y page 245). opener. The signal is not recognized during
programming. Comparable with Canadian
law, some U.S. garage door openers also fea-
ture a "break".
Features 247
Proceed as follows: Problems when programming

Rif you live in Canada
Rif you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where
you live) when using the programming
steps.

ror
If you are experiencing problems programing
the integrated garage door opener on the
rear-view mirror, take note of the following
instructions:
ror RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage
X Press and hold button ;, = or ? of the door drive remote control A. This can usu-
integrated garage door opener. ally be found on the back of the remote
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights control.
up yellow. The integrated garage door opener is com-
X Release the button. patible with devices that have units which
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. operate in the frequency range of 280 to
X Press button B of remote control A for
433 MHz.
2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds. RReplace the batteries in garage door
X Press button B again and hold for

remote control A. This increases the like-
2 seconds. lihood that garage door remote control A
will transmit a strong and precise signal to
X Repeat this sequence on button B of
the integrated garage door opener.
remote control A until indicator lamp :
RWhen programming, hold remote control
lights up green.
If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the A at varying distances and angles from the
process. button which you are programming. Try var-
ious angles at a distance between 2and
X Continue with the other programing steps
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle
(see above).
but at varying distances.
RIf another remote control is available for the
same garage door drive, repeat the same
programming steps with this remote con-
trol. Before performing these steps, make
sure that new batteries have been installed
in garage door drive remote control A.
RNote that some remote controls only trans-
mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-
cator lamp on the remote control goes out).
Z
248 Features
Press button B on remote control A again Clearing the memory

before transmission ends.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
tion/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door


ror
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
integrated garage door opener before selling
the vehicle.
Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mir- tion lock (Y page 127).
ror
X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
After it has been programmed, the integrated The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
garage door opener performs the function of and then green.
the garage door system remote control. X Release buttons ; and ?.
Please also read the operating instructions The memory of the integrated garage door
for the garage door system. opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
X Press button ;, = or ? which you have Compass
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi- Calling up the compass
cator lamp : lights up green. The compass displays in which compass
Garage door system with a rolling code: direction the vehicle is currently traveling: N,
indicator lamp : flashes green. NE, E, SE
NE SE, S, SW
SW, W or NW
NW.
i The transmitter will transmit a signal as
long as the button is pressed. The trans-
mission is halted after a maximum of
10 seconds and indicator lamp : lights up
yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again if
necessary.
Features 249
To receive a correct display in rear-view mir- X Push a round pen into opening =
ror :, the compass must be calibrated and (Y page 248) for approximately 3 seconds.
the magnetic field zone set. The zone currently selected appears in
compass display ; (Y page 248).
Setting the compass X To select the zone: push a round pen into
X Determine your position using the following opening = (Y page 248) until the desired
zone maps. zone is selected.
If, after a few seconds, the display in com-
pass display ; (Y page 248) changes

direction, the zone has been selected.
Calibrating the compass

X Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding
traffic.
In order to calibrate the compass correctly,
do the following:
Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not
in the vicinity of steel structures or high-
voltage transmission lines.
Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear
North America zone map window defroster.
Rclose all doors and the tailgate.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Push a round pen into opening =
(Y page 248) for approximately 6 seconds,
until the C symbol is shown in compass dis-
play ; (Y page 248).
X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approx-
imately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph
(10 km/h).
When the calibration has successfully been
completed, the current direction is shown
in compass display ; (Y page 248).
Floormat on the driver's side

South America zone map G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Z
250 Features
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are

sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
X Slide the seat backwards.

X To install: place the floormat in the foot-
well.
X Press safety catch knobs : onto retain-
ers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-
ers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
251

Engine compartment ........................ 252
Maintenance ...................................... 254
Care .................................................... 256
Maintenance and care

252 Engine compartment

The engine compartment contains moving
i This Operator's Manual describes all components. Certain components, such as
models and all standard and optional equip- the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
ment of your vehicle available at the time of again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
publication of the Operator's Manual. is a risk of injury.
Country-specific differences are possible. If you need to do any work inside the engine
Bear in mind that your vehicle may not fea- compartment:
Rswitch off the ignition
functions. Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
i Read the information on qualified special- such as the fan rotation area
ist workshops: (Y page 24).
Rremove jewelry and watches
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Engine compartment ple, away from moving parts
Hood Opening the hood

G WARNING
G WARNING Certain components on the engine may be
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when very hot. When carrying out work on the
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. engine there is a risk of injury.
There is a risk of an accident. Where possible, let the engine cool down and
Never unlatch the hood while driving. touch only the components described in the
following.
G WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may G WARNING
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is When the hood is open and the windshield
a risk of injury to persons within range of wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
movement of the hood. the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Open and close the hood only when no one is Always switch off the windshield wipers and
within its range of movement. the ignition before opening the hood.
G WARNING ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are

not folded away from the windshield. You
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
could otherwise damage the windshield
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
wipers or the hood.
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
Engine compartment 253
Closing the hood

X Raise the hood slightly and, at the same
time, remove support strut ? from yellow
retaining clip =.
X Swing support strut ? down and press it
into bracket A until it engages.
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height
of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are properly engaged. Do not press the hood

switched off. closed. Open the hood again and close it
X Pull release lever : on the hood. with a little more force.
The hood is released.
Checking and adding other service

products
Checking coolant level
G WARNING
The engine cooling system is pressurized, par-
ticularly when the engine is warm. When
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before opening the
X With your hand flat, palm facing down, cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
reach into the gap between the hood and opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
the radiator trim. turn to allow pressure to escape.
X Press the hood catch lever ; to the left.
X Raise the hood. ! The coolant may only be checked and cor-
rected when the engine is cool (coolant
temperature below 104 (40 ). Check-
ing the coolant when the coolant tempera-
ture is above 104 (40 ) may result in
damage to the engine or to the engine cool-
ing system.
X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A.

X Lift up support strut ? and insert it into
yellow retaining clip =.
Z
254 Maintenance
Where possible, let the engine cool down and

touch only the components described in the
following.
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flam-
mable. If it comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the front compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
Example centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level when the vehi-
cle is on a level surface and the drive sys-
tem has cooled down.
X Check the coolant temperature display in
the instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below
104 (40 ).
Example
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-
clockwise and allow excess pressure to
X Add the premixed washer fluid.
escape. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and until it engages.

remove it. The recommended minimum fluid level in the
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = washer fluid reservoir is 0.26 US gal (1 liter).
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. ommended minimum fluid level of 0.26 US gal
X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes- (1 liter), a message appears in the multifunc-
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. tion display prompting you to add washer fluid
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
(Y page 214).
as it will go. Further information on windshield washer
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 310).
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 309).
Maintenance
Windshield washer system
ASSYST PLUS
G WARNING
Certain components on the engine may be Service messages
very hot. When carrying out work on the The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
engine there is a risk of injury. informs you of the next service due date.
Maintenance 255
For information on the type of service and Displaying service messages

service intervals, see the separate Mainte-
X Switch on the ignition.
nance Booklet.
X Press the = or ; button to select the
You can obtain further information from an
Serv. menu.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by
The multifunction display shows a service
pressing the a button.
message for several seconds, e.g.:
The service due date appears in the multi-
RService A in .. Days function display.
RService A Due
RService A Exceeded by .. Days Information about Service

Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter-
the next service due date is displayed. val display
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
number or another letter, indicates the type play has been inadvertently reset, this set-
of service. A stands for a minor service and B ting can be corrected at a qualified special-
for a major service. ist workshop.
You can obtain further information from an Have service work carried out as described
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. in the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-
erwise lead to increased wear and damage
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
to the major assemblies or the vehicle.
does not take into account any periods of
time during which the battery is disconnec- A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
ted. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset
Maintaining the time-dependent service the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
schedule: after the service work has been carried out.
You can also obtain further information on
X Note down the service due date displayed maintenance work, for example.
in the multifunction display before discon-
necting the battery. Special service requirements
or The specified maintenance interval takes only
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the normal operation of the vehicle into
the battery disconnection periods from the account. Under arduous operating conditions
service date shown on the display. or increased load on the vehicle, mainte-
nance work must be carried out more fre-
quently, for example:
Hiding a service message
Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-
X Press the a or % button on the steer- ate stops
ing wheel. Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel
short distances
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
Rif the engine is often left idling for long peri-
ods
Z
256 Care
Under arduous operating conditions, the tires Use care products and cleaning agents rec-
must be checked more often. Further infor- ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
mation can be obtained at a qualified special-
ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. Exterior care
Driving abroad Automatic car wash
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
is also available in other countries. You can
G WARNING
obtain further information from any author- Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic

Care conditions until full braking power is restored.
General notes ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless

Automatic Car Wash as these use special
H Environmental note cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
ner. ! When washing your vehicle in a tow-
through car wash, make sure that the selec-
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any tor lever is in position N, otherwise the
of the following: vehicle could be damaged.
Rdry, rough or hard cloths ! Make sure that:
Rabrasive cleaning agents Rthe side windows are fully closed.
Rsolvents Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off
Rcleaning agents containing solvents (the OFF button has been pressed/the
Do not scrub. airflow control is set to position 0).
Do not touch the surfaces or protective Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice 0.
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
damage the surfaces and protective film. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended wash from the very start.
period straight after cleaning it, particularly If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
increased corrosion of the brake discs and wax from the windshield and the wiper
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
should drive for a few minutes after clean- wiping noises caused by residue on the wind-
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the shield.
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
vehicle can then be parked. Washing by hand
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
In some countries, washing by hand is only
retaining the quality in the long term.
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Care 257
Observe the legal requirements in each coun- Rbattery

try. Rconnectors
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Rlights
vehicle in direct sunlight. Rseals
X Use a soft sponge to clean. Rtrim
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car Rventilation slots
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Damaged seals or electrical components
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
can lead to leaks or failures.
gentle jet of water.
X Do not point the water jet directly towards Cleaning the paintwork
the air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
! Do not affix:
sponge frequently. Rstickers
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry Rfilms
thoroughly with a chamois. Rmagnetic plates or similar items
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
paintwork. damage the paintwork.
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
soon as possible when driving in winter. while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover
Power washers and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
G WARNING
off the treated areas afterwards.
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo- and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
edly. There is a risk of an accident. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
Do not use power washers with circular jet X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
tires or chassis components replaced imme- Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
diately. the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
The following cannot always be completely
! Always maintain a distance of at least
repaired:
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
power washer nozzle. Information about Rscratches
the correct distance is available from the Rcorrosive deposits
equipment manufacturer. Rareas affected by corrosion
Move the power washer nozzle around Rdamage caused by inadequate care
when cleaning your vehicle.
In such cases, visit a qualified specialist work-
Do not aim directly at any of the following: shop.
Rtires If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. surface, use the paint care products recom-
Relectrical components mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
This is the case approximately every three to
Z
258 Care
five months, depending on the climate con- Cleaning the wheels

ditions and the care product used.
If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface or
G WARNING
if the paintwork has become dull, then the The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
paintwork should be cleaned. Use the clean- blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
ing product Paint Cleaner, which has been to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
approved by Mercedes-Benz. nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use these care products in the sun or
on the hood while the hood is hot. Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
Matte finish care tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy

wheels. Polishing causes the finish to ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
shine. to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
! The following may cause the paint to
become shiny and thus reduce the matte ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
effect: period straight after cleaning it, particularly
RVigorous
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
rubbing with unsuitable mate-
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
rials.
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
RFrequent use of car washes.
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. should drive for a few minutes after clean-
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
wax. These products are only suitable for vehicle can then be parked.
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
with matte finish leads to considerable sur- Cleaning the windows
face damage (shiny, spotted areas).
G WARNING
Always have paintwork repairs carried out
You could become trapped by the windshield
at a qualified specialist workshop.
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
treatment under any circumstances. injury.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a Always switch off the windshield wipers and
clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
damage to the paintwork due to incorrect wiper blades.
treatment.
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise,
with a clear matte finish.
you will damage the hood.
i The vehicle should preferably be washed
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
and plenty of water.
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo not touch the insides of the windows with
from the range of recommended and hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.
approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Care 259
There is otherwise a risk of damaging the Cleaning the exterior lighting

windows.
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
! Clean the water drainage channels of the cloths which are suitable for plastic light
windshield and the rear window at regular lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
and pollen may under certain circumstan- the plastic light lenses.
ces prevent water from draining away. This X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
can lead to corrosion damage and damage lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
to electronic components. cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
X Clean the inside and outside of the win- shampoo or cleaning cloths.
dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning

product that is recommended and Cleaning the mirror turn signals
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
Cleaning wiper blades cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
G WARNING cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
You could become trapped by the windshield lenses of the mirror turn signals.
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of signals in the exterior mirror housing using
injury. a wet sponge or cleaning cloth. Use a mild
Always switch off the windshield wipers and cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or Autoshampoo.
wiper blades.
Cleaning the sensors
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, ! If you clean the sensors with a power
you will damage the hood. washer, make sure that you keep a dis-
tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.
the wiper blade could be damaged. Information about the correct distance is
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and available from the equipment manufac-
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the turer.
graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
the windshield.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
Z
260 Care
Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-
lowing:
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household clean-
ing agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-

ble damage to the display.
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that
it is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean sensors : of the driving systems
X Clean the display surface using a commer-
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
cially available microfiber cloth and
TFT/LCD display cleaner.
Cleaning the rear view camera
X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area fiber cloth.
around the rear view camera with a power
washer. Cleaning the plastic trim
G WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag deploy-
ment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean ces:
camera lens :. Rstickers
Rfilms
Rscented oil bottles or similar items
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
or sunscreen to come into contact with the
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
look of the surfaces.
Care 261
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free covers. If used often, these can damage the
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. cover.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
i Note that regular care is essential to
ucts recommended and approved by ensure that the appearance and comfort of
Mercedes-Benz. the covers is retained over time.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again. Genuine leather seat covers
Leather is a natural product.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
selector lever example:
Rdifferences in the texture
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use

leather care agents that have been recom- Rsigns of stretching and marking
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Rslight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele- material defects.
ments
! To retain the natural appearance of the
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents leather, observe the following cleaning
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol- instructions:
ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of RClean genuine leather covers carefully
damaging the surface. with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. ers down with a dry cloth.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are RMake sure that the leather does not
mostly made of anodized aluminum and become soaked. It may otherwise
can lose their shine if chrome polish is become rough and cracked.
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead ROnly use leather care agents that have
when cleaning the trim pieces. been tested and approved by Mercedes-
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you fied specialist workshop.
are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
Seat covers of other materials
are chrome-plated or not, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Observe the following when cleaning:
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber moistened with a solution containing 1%

cloth. detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- RClean cloth covers with a microfiber
ucts recommended and approved by cloth moistened with a solution contain-

Mercedes-Benz. ing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liq-
uid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
Cleaning the seat covers
lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards.
General notes Cleaning results depend on the type of
dirt and how long it has been there.
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean gen-
RClean Alcantara covers with a damp
uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
Z
262 Care
seat sections to avoid leaving visible

lines.
Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by heating at temperatures above 176
(80 ) or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-
tion.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets

X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
or a cleaning agent recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-
ing agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
263

Where will I find...? ........................... 264
Flat tire .............................................. 264
12 V battery (vehicle) ....................... 265
Jump-starting .................................... 269
Towing ............................................... 271
Fuses .................................................. 274
Breakdown Assistance
264 Flat tire
Useful information X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and

level ground, as far away as possible from
i This Operator's Manual describes all traffic.
models and all standard and optional equip- X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
ment of your vehicle available at the time of X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
publication of the Operator's Manual. (Y page 144).
Country-specific differences are possible. X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
Bear in mind that your vehicle may not fea- straight-ahead position.
X Switch off the drive system.
functions.
lock.
i Read the information on qualified special- X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
ist workshops: (Y page 24). Make sure that they are not endangered as
they do so.
X Make sure that no one is near the danger
Where will I find...?
area while a wheel is being changed. Any-
Vehicle tool kit one who is not directly assisting in the
wheel change should, for example, stand
General notes behind the barrier.
i Apart from certain country-specific varia- X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-
tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a fic conditions when doing so.
tire-change tool kit. Some tools for chang- X Close the driver's door.
ing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For
more information on which tire changing
tools are required and approved to perform MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a properties)
Tools required for changing a wheel may General notes
include, for example: When using tires with run-flat characteristics,
RJack you can continue to drive your vehicle even if
RWheel chock there is a total loss of pressure in one or more
tires. The affected tire must not show any
RLug wrench
clearly visible damage.
You can recognize tires with run-flat charac-
Flat tire teristics by the MOExtended marking which
appears on the tire sidewall. You will find this
Preparing the vehicle marking next to the tire size designation, the
Your vehicle can be fitted with MOExtended load-bearing capacity and the speed index
tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) (Y page 293).
(Y page 264). Tires with run-flat characteristics may only be
Check if your vehicle is fitted with used in conjunction with an active tire pres-
MOExtended tires. Vehicle preparation is not sure monitor.
necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires
Information on changing/mounting a wheel
(Y page 300).
12 V battery (vehicle) 265
If the pressure loss warning message Important safety notes

appears in the multifunction display:
G WARNING
RObserve the instructions in the display
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
messages (Y page 211).
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
RCheck the tire for damage.
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
RIf driving on, observe the following notes. There is a risk of an accident.
The maximum driving distance is approx- Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
imately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
partially laden and approximately 18 miles and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
(30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden. off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- vehicle.
tance possible depends upon: Stop driving in emergency mode if:
RSpeed
Ryou hear banging noises.
RRoad condition Rthevehicle starts to shake.
ROutside temperature Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode RESP is intervening constantly.
may be reduced by extreme driving condi- Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
tions/maneuvers, or it can be increased
After driving in emergency mode, have the
through a moderate style of driving.
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
The maximum permissible distance which workshop with regard to their further use. The
can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from defective tire must be replaced in every case.
the moment the tire pressure loss warning
appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of 12 V battery (vehicle)
50 mph (80 km/h).
i When replacing one or all tires, make sure
that you use only tires: Work on the 12 V battery, such as removal or
Rof the size specified for the vehicle and installation, requires specialist knowledge
and the use of special tools. You should there-
Rmarked "MOExtended"
fore have all work involving the battery car-
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
replaced with an MOExtended tire, a stand-
ard tire may be used as a temporary meas-
ure. Make sure that you use the proper size
and type (summer or winter tire).
i Vehicles featuring tires with run-flat char-
acteristics are not equipped with a TIREFIT
kit at the factory. It is therefore recommen-
ded that you additionally equip your vehicle
with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do
not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter
tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a
Z
266 12 V battery (vehicle)
G WARNING G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery During the charging process, a battery produ-
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
lead to function restrictions applying to ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys- RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP connected battery does not come into con-
(Electronic Stability Program). The operating tact with vehicle parts.
safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
could lose control of the vehicle, for example: tery.
Rbraking RIt is important that you observe the descri-
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver bed order of the battery terminals when
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not connecting and disconnecting a battery.
adapted to the road conditions RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
There is a risk of an accident. battery poles with identical polarity are
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- connected.
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop RIt is particularly important to observe the
immediately. Do not drive any further. You described order when connecting and dis-
should have all work involving the battery car- connecting the jumper cables.
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
For further information about ABS and ESP,
see (Y page 63) and (Y page 66). G WARNING
G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an over the battery. Keep children away from
explosion. batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle water and seek medical attention.
body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up. H Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when substances. It is against the
charging the battery as well as when jump- law to dispose of them with
starting. the household rubbish. They
Always make sure that neither you nor the must be collected separately
battery is electrostatically charged. A build- and recycled to protect the
up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for environment.
example: Dispose of batteries in an
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic environmentally friendly
fibers manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
cialist workshop or a special
Rif you push or pull the battery across the
collection point for used bat-
carpet or other synthetic materials teries.
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth
12 V battery (vehicle) 267
! Have the battery checked regularly at a Rinse any acid spills immediately
qualified specialist workshop. with clear water. Contact a physi-
Observe the service intervals in the Main- cian if necessary.
tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe- Wear eye protection.
cialist workshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving the
battery carried out at a qualified specialist Keep children away.
workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
necessary for you to disconnect the battery
yourself, make sure that:
Observe this Operator's Manual.
Rengage gear P.
Ryou switch off the ignition and remove
the SmartKey. Make sure the ignition is
switched off. Check that all the indicator For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
lamps in the instrument cluster are off. mends that you only use batteries which have
Otherwise, electronic components, such been tested and approved for your vehicle by
as the alternator, may be damaged. Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
Ryou first remove the negative terminal increased impact protection to prevent vehi-
clamp and then the positive terminal cle occupants from suffering acid burns
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. should the battery be damaged in the event of
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys- an accident.
tem may be damaged. In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-
Rthe transmission is locked in position P mum possible service life, it must always be
after disconnecting the battery. The vehi- sufficiently charged.
cle is secured against rolling away. You Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
can then no longer move the vehicle. discharge over time if you do not use the
The battery and the cover of the positive vehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-
terminal clamp must be installed securely nected at a qualified specialist workshop. You
during operation. can also charge the battery with a charger
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a
Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
qualified specialist workshop for further infor-
tective measures when handling batteries.
mation.
Risk of explosion.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle
Fire, open flames and smoking are for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-
prohibited when handling the bat- cialist workshop if you wish to leave your
tery. Avoid creating sparks. vehicle parked for a long period of time.
Only replace a battery with a battery that has
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con- been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
tact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective clothing, i Remove the SmartKey if you park the
especially gloves, apron and face- vehicle and do not require any electrical
guard. consumers. The vehicle will then use very
little energy, thus conserving battery
power.
Z
268 12 V battery (vehicle)
i If the power supply has been interrupted, tery in the jump-starting procedure
e.g. if the battery was discharged, you will (Y page 269).
have to: If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
Rset the clock (see separate audio sys- warning lamps in the instrument cluster do
tem/COMAND operating instructions) not light up, it is highly likely that the dis-
charged battery has frozen. In this case you
may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge
Charging the battery the battery. The service life of a thawed-out
battery may be shorter. The starting charac-
G WARNING teristics can be impaired, particularly at low
During charging and jump-starting, explosive temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery
gases can escape from the battery. There is a checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
risk of an explosion. Only charge the installed battery with a bat-
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating tery charger which has been tested and
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery

ventilation while charging and jump-starting. charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-
Do not lean over a battery. Benz vehicles and tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory.
G WARNING It permits the charging of the battery in its
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. installed position. Contact an authorized
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean tion and availability. Read the battery charg-
over the battery. Keep children away from er's operating instructions before charging
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with the battery.
water and seek medical attention.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-

mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 269).
X Open the hood.
X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same
order as when connecting the donor bat-
Jump-starting 269
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek
medical attention.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.

Do not use a rapid-charging device to start the engine.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not
light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither
jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be
shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have
the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the 12 V battery is discharged, or after the vehicle has been jump-started, the Service
Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer message appears. There is a malfunction in
the on-board voltage. Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z
270 Jump-starting
The drive system cannot be started if the 12 V battery is discharged. This is not dependent on
whether the high-voltage battery is charged or not. The vehicle cannot be jump-started if the
high-voltage battery is discharged. The high-voltage battery must be charged first.
The drive system can be started using another vehicle.
ROnly use batteries with an equal nominal voltage (12 volts).
RMake sure that the battery of the donor vehicle does not have a significantly lower capacity
than the discharged battery.
RUse jumper cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps from a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
RRoute the jumper cables so that they cannot be caught by rotating components in the engine
compartment.
RDo not disconnect the discharged battery from the vehicle's electrical system.
X Switch off the engine of both vehicles.

X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Remove the battery cover.
X Connect positive terminal ; on the vehicle with the flat battery to positive terminal = of the
donor vehicle using the red jumper cable. Begin with the flat battery.
X Connect negative terminal ? of the donor vehicle to negative terminal A of the vehicle with
the flat battery using the black jumper cable, beginning with donor vehicle's battery B.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Switch on the ignition in the vehicle with the flat battery.
X If the traction drive cannot be activated immediately, wait for approximately 60 seconds
between starting attempts.
If the drive system does not start, call a breakdown service.
Towing 271
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
Towing ! Observe the following points when towing

with a tow rope:
RSecure the tow rope on the same side on
G WARNING both vehicles.
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or REnsure that the tow cable is not longer
no longer available if: than legally permitted. Mark the tow
Rthe ignition is switched off cable in the middle, e.g. with a white
cloth (30 x 30 cm). This will make other
Rthe brake system or the power steering is
road users aware that the vehicle is being
malfunctioning
towed.
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply
ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing
or the vehicle's electrical system
eye.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more RObserve the brake lamps of the towing
force may be necessary to steer or brake.
vehicle while driving. Always maintain a
distance so that the tow rope does not
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, sag.
make sure that the steering moves freely. RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow
your vehicle. You could otherwise dam-
G WARNING age the vehicle.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery
gross weight of your vehicle, the: purposes as this could damage the vehicle.
If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
Rthe towing eye could detach itself
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- ! If the HOLD function is activated, the vehi-
over. cle brakes automatically in certain situa-
tions. To prevent damage to the vehicle,
deactivate the HOLD function in the follow-
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, ing or other similar situations:
its weight should not be greater than the per-
Rwhen towing the vehicle
missible gross weight of your vehicle.
Rin the car wash
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle
mass rating can be found in the "Dimensions
! Make sure that the electric parking brake
is released. If the electric parking brake is
and weights" section (Y page 311).
faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Make sure that no charging cable is plugged Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
in. The parking lock cannot be released if a an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
charging cable is plugged in. this purpose.
! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
Z
272 Towing
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of i The function of the electric parking brake
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of and the parking lock is dependent on the
30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is
If the vehicle has to be towed more than low or there is a malfunction in the system,
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be it may not be possible to apply the released
raised and transported. parking brake or shift the transmission to
position P.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage the vehicle. i Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g.
the radio.
Observe the legal requirements for the rele-
vant countries when towing. i Disarm the automatic locking feature
If the vehicle can no longer be driven because before the vehicle is towed (Y page 188).
of an accident or breakdown, you have the You could otherwise be locked out when
following options: pushing or towing the vehicle.
Rtransporting the vehicle

As a rule, you should have the vehicle trans- Installing/removing the towing eye
ported.
Rtowing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow Installing the towing eye
bar
Only tow the vehicle in exceptional cases.
Observe the following notes.
The vehicle may not be towed and must
always be transported if:
Rthe multifunction display is not working
Rone of more of the following warning lamps
is lit up:
- Drive system
- 12 V battery
Rone or both of the following display mes-
sages have appeared:
- Stop Switch Engine Off
- Service Required Do Not Shift
Gears Visit Dealer Example: towing eye mounting covers
Rthe brake pedal begins to pulsate as the
X Remove the towing eye from the stowage
towing procedure commences.
space.
Ryou have to tow the vehicle over a longer
The towing eye is located in the stowage
distance than 30 miles (50 km).
well under the trunk floor.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing
Otherwise, you:
eye is beneath the tire inflation compres-
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in sor.
the ignition lock X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
Rcannot release the electric parking brake direction of the arrow.
Rcannot shift the transmission to position N
Towing 273
X Take cover : off the opening. If the 12 V battery indicator lamp lights up,
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as you must observe the following points:
it will go and tighten it. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon
as possible, paying attention to road and
Removing the towing eye traffic conditions.
X Unscrew the towing eye counter-clock-
wise. X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Attach cover : to the bumper and press

until it engages.
X Place the towing eye in the stowage well
Towing the vehicle with the front axle
under the trunk floor.
raised
Observe the important safety notes when
towing your vehicle with the front axle raised
Towing a vehicle with both axles on (Y page 271).
the ground
! The ignition must be switched off if the
Observe the important safety instructions vehicle is being towed with the front axle
when towing your vehicle with both axles on raised. Otherwise, ESP may intervene and
the ground (Y page 271). damage the brake system.
i In order to signal a change of direction X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
when towing with the hazard warning lamps X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
switched on, use the combination switch as tion lock.
usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
for the direction of travel flash. After reset- X Shift the transmission to position P.
ting the combination switch, the hazard
warning lamp starts flashing again.
X Release the electric parking brake.
The transmission automatically shifts to posi-
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
tion P when you open the driver's or front-
passenger door or when you remove the (Y page 100).
SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
ensure that the transmission stays in position position 0 and leave the SmartKey in the
N when towing the vehicle, you must observe ignition lock.
the following points:
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised
tion lock.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal. When towing your vehicle with the rear axle
X Shift the transmission to position N.
raised, it is important that you observe the
safety instructions (Y page 271).
X Release the electric parking brake.
! The ignition must be switched off if you
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
raised. Intervention by ESP could other-
(Y page 100).
wise damage the brake system.
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Z
274 Fuses
The transmission automatically shifts to posi- axle or steering components. Otherwise,

tion P when you open the driver's or front- the vehicle could be damaged.
passenger door or when you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to
ensure that the transmission stays in position Fuses
N when towing the vehicle, you must observe
the following points:
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
tion lock. you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
age, the electric cables could be overloaded.
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
X Shift the transmission to position N.
accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified

X Apply the electric parking brake. new fuses having the correct amperage.
X Position the front wheels in the straight-
ahead position. ! Only use fuses that have been approved
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
(Y page 100). have the correct fuse rating for the system
concerned. Only use fuses marked with an
X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
"S". Otherwise, components or systems
position 0 and leave the SmartKey in the
could be damaged.
ignition lock.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
Transporting the vehicle nents on the circuit and their functions stop
operating.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting the same rating, which you can recognize by
purposes. the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- in the fuse allocation chart.
tion lock. If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
brake pedal and keep it depressed. cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
X Shift the transmission to position N. Mercedes-Benz Center.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by Before changing a fuse
applying the electric parking brake. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
X Shift the transmission to position P. (Y page 144).
X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to X Switch off all electrical consumers.
position 0 and remove the SmartKey from X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
the ignition lock. tion lock and remove it (Y page 127). All
X Secure the vehicle. indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
Fuses 275
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell
The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in
the front-passenger footwell (Y page 275).
Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNING X To close: check whether the seal is seated
correctly in cover :.
When the hood is open and the windshield
X Insert cover : at the back into openings
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. A on the fuse box.
X Slide hood release cable ? to the side and
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood. hold if necessary.
X Fold down cover :.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the X Clip hood release cable ? into bracket =.
fuse box when the cover is open. X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and
! When closing the cover, make sure that it close.
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture X Close the hood.
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-
well
X Open the hood.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box. X To open: remove the floormat from the
X To open: unclip hood release cable ? from front-passenger side.
the bracket =. X Fold out perforated floor covering : in the
X Open retaining clamps ;. direction of the arrow.
X Fold up cover : in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.
Z
276 Fuses
X To release cover =, press retaining

clamp ;.
X Fold out cover = in the direction of the
arrow to the catch.

X Remove cover = forwards.
i Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the

lower right-hand side of cover =.
X To close: insert cover = on the left-hand
side of the fuse box into the retainer.
Cover = engages in the retainers.
X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock
audibly.
X Fold back perforated floor covering :.
277

Operation ........................................... 278
Winter operation ............................... 280
Tire pressure ..................................... 281
Loading the vehicle .......................... 288
Maximum load rating ....................... 291
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards .......................................... 291
Tire labeling ....................................... 293
Definition of terms for tires and
loading ............................................... 296
Changing a wheel ............................. 299
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 303
Wheels and tires

278 Operation
Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics:

Rpay attention to the information and warn-
i This Operator's Manual describes all ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
models and all standard and optional equip- run-flat characteristics).
publication of the Operator's Manual. Accessories that are not approved for your
Country-specific differences are possible. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being
Bear in mind that your vehicle may not fea- used correctly can impair the operating
ture all functions described here. This also safety.
applies to safety-relevant systems and Before purchasing and using non-approved
functions. accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
i Read the information on qualified special- shop and ask about:
ist workshops: (Y page 24). Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Information on dimensions and types of
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found
G WARNING
(Y page 303).
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
Wheels and tires
Information on air pressure for the tires on

the wheel brakes or suspension components
your vehicle can be found:
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
Always replace wheels and tires with those tion placard on the B-pillar
that fulfill the specifications of the original Ron the tire pressure label on the charge
part. socket flap (Y page 281)
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 281)
correct:
i Further information on wheels and tires
Rdesignation can be obtained at any qualified specialist
Rmodel workshop.
When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct:
Operation
Rdesignation
Rmanufacturer Information on driving
Rmodel RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the
tire pressures and correct them if neces-
G WARNING sary.
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. noises and unusual handling characteris-
There is a risk of accident. tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi-
Tires without run-flat characteristics: cate that the wheels or tires are damaged.
If you suspect that a tire is defective,
Rdo not drive with a flat tire.
reduce your speed immediately. Stop the
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your vehicle as soon as possible to check the
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire
consult a qualified specialist workshop. damage could also be causing the unusual
Operation 279
handling characteristics. If you find no The service life of tires depends, among other
signs of damage, have the tires and wheels things, on the following factors:
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Rdrivingstyle
RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that
Rtirepressure
the tires do not get deformed by the curb or
Rdistance covered
other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive
over curbs, speed humps or similar eleva-
tions, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse
Important safety notes on the tire
angle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly the
tread
sidewalls, may be damaged.
G WARNING
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
Regular checking of wheels and tires The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
G WARNING This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
ditions. There is a risk of accident.
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Wheels and tires

ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
Check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for should regularly check the tread depth and
damage at least once a month, as well as after the condition of the tread across the entire
driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged width of all tires.
wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay Minimum tire tread depth for:
particular attention to damage such as: RSummer tires: in (3 mm)
Rcuts in the tires RM+S tires: in (4 mm)
Rpunctures For safety reasons, replace the tires before
Rtears in the tires the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
Rbulges on tires tire tread depth is reached.
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tire (Y page 279). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems, Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. into the tire tread.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
pressure as necessary (Y page 281). tread. They are visible once the tread depth is
Z
280 Winter operation
approximately in (1.6 mm). If this is the M+S tires

case, the tire is so worn that it must be
replaced. G WARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
Selecting, mounting and replacing and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
tires a risk of an accident.
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same M+S tires with a tread depth of less than in
type and make. (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
Exception: it is permissible to install a dif- At temperatures below 45 (+7 ), use win-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire
tire. Observe the "Tires with run-flat char- are identified by the M+S marking.
acteristics" section (Y page 264).
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto
symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-
the wheels. vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for ditions. Only these tires will allow driving
the first 60 miles (100 km). The tires only safety systems such as ABS and ESP to
reach their full performance after this dis- function optimally in winter. These tires have
tance. been developed specifically for driving in
Wheels and tires
RDo not drive with tires which have too little snow.
tread depth, as this significantly reduces Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). all wheels to maintain safe handling charac-
RReplace the tires after six years at the lat- teristics.
est, regardless of wear. Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
Winter operation
Once the winter tires are mounted:
General notes X Check the tire pressures (Y page 284).
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified X Restart the tire pressure monitor
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. (Y page 287).
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 299).
Snow chains
Driving with summer tires G WARNING

If snow chains are mounted on the rear
At temperatures below 45 (+7 ), summer wheels, the snow chains could cause abrasion
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and to the vehicle body or to chassis components.
braking power. Change the tires on your vehi- This could cause damage to the vehicle or the
cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very tires. There is a risk of an accident.
cold temperatures could cause cracks to
form, thereby damaging the tires perma-
nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept
responsibility for this type of damage.
Tire pressure 281
To avoid hazardous situations: Tire pressure

Rnever mount snow chains on the rear Tire pressure specifications
wheels
Ronly mount snow chains in pairs on the G WARNING
front wheels. Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
! On some tire sizes there is not enough Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
space for snow chains. To avoid damage to and vehicle speed increase.
the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
tire combinations" section under "Tires and
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
wheels".
traction.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
mends that you only use snow chains that ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
have been specially approved for your vehicle
by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
standard of quality. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
If you intend to mount snow chains, please
ing the spare wheel:
bear the following points in mind:
Rmonthly, at least
Wheels and tires

RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible Rif the load changes
wheel-tire combinations (Y page 303). Rbefore beginning a long journey
ROnly use snow chains when driving on Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
roads completely covered by snow. off-road driving
Remove the snow chains as soon as possi- If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
ble when you come to a road that is not
snow-covered. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg- does not permit any reliable conclusion about
ulations if you wish to mount snow chains. the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). pressure can be checked in the on-board
computer.
RWhen snow chains are installed, never use
Active Parking Assist (Y page 159). The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
i You may wish to deactivate ESP labels described here.
(Y page 67) when pulling away with snow 1.) Tire and Loading Information placard
chains installed. You can thereby allow the on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehi-
wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach- cle (Y page 288).
ieving an increased driving force (cutting
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
action).
tains the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
are valid for the maximum permissible load
and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
speed.
Z
282 Tire pressure
: Recommended tire pressures Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions
2.) Tire pressure table on the inside of the Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
charge socket flap. diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
The tire pressure table contains the recom- R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and
mended pressures for cold tires for various can be found on the tire sidewall
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and (Y page 293).
speed conditions.
i Specifications shown in the examples of
Wheels and tires
tire pressure tables are for illustration pur-

poses only. Tire pressure specifications are
vehicle-specific and may deviate from the
data shown here. Tire pressure specifica-
tions applicable to your vehicle are located
in your vehicle's tire pressure table.
If the tire pressure have been set for light

loads and/or low speeds, set them to the
higher values:
Rif you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds
i The tire pressures for increased loads

and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted tire pressure table, may have a negative
for this vehicle by the factory
effect on driving comfort.
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire
pressure information following is only valid If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially can lead to an excessive build up of heat and
laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the a sudden loss of pressure.
table for different numbers of occupants and For more information, contact a qualified spe-
amounts of luggage. The actual number of cialist workshop.
seats may differ.
Tire pressure 283
Important notes on tire pressure ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correct
the tire pressure if it is too low for the current
G WARNING operating conditions. If you check the tire
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the pressure when the tires are warm, the result-
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire ing value will be higher than if the tires were
pressure that is too low may result in a tire cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. pressure to the value specified for cold tires.
RCheck the tire for foreign objects. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the Observe the recommended tire pressures for
valve is leaking. cold tires:
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
tact a qualified specialist workshop. on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the
G WARNING fuel filler flap
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure Underinflated or overinflated tires
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This Underinflated tires
Wheels and tires

can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a G WARNING
risk of an accident.
Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
Only screw the standard valve cap or other heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
your vehicle onto the tire valve. ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
does not permit any reliable conclusion about Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
the tire pressure. tires, including the spare wheel.
The tire temperature and pressure increase Underinflated tires may:
when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
ent on the driving speed and the load.
Rhave an adverse effect on energy consump-
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
sures when the tires are cold. tion
Roverheat, leading to tire defects
The tires are cold:
Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac-
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires
teristics
out of direct sunlight for at least 3 hours
and
Overinflated tires
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km) G WARNING
The tire temperature changes depending on Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed because they are damaged more easily by
and the tire load. If the tire temperature road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
changes by 18 (10 ), the tire pressure also suffer from irregular wear, which can
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ severely impair the braking properties and the
1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-
Z
284 Tire pressure
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an Information on air pressure for the tires on
accident. your vehicle can be found:
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
tires, including the spare wheel. tion placard on the B-pillar
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
Overinflated tires may: flap
Radversely affect handling Rin the "Tire pressure information" section
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
Rbe more likely to become damaged Checking tire pressures manually
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort To determine and set the correct tire pres-
Rincrease the braking distance sure, proceed as follows:
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to
Maximum tire pressures be checked.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible tire X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
inflation pressure. Always observe the rec- the valve.
ommended tire pressure for your vehicle X Read the tire pressure and compare it with
when adjusting the tire pressure the recommended value on the Tire and
(Y page 281). Loading Information placard. The loading
Wheels and tires
information table is on the B-pillar on the

driver's side of your vehicle.
X If necessary, increase the tire pressure to
the recommended value (Y page 281).
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by
pressing down the metal pin in the valve
using the tip of a pen, for example. Then,
check the tire pressure again using the tire
pressure gauge.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres- X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
sure
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- Tire pressure monitor
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration. General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
Checking the tire pressures cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the
tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-
Important safety notes sure monitor warns you if the pressure drops
in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure
Observe the "Tire pressure information" sec-
monitor only functions if the correct sensors
tion (Y page 281).
are installed on all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in
the multifunction display. After a few minutes
of driving, the current tire pressure of each
Tire pressure 285
tire is shown in the Serv. menu of the multi- trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
function display. sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp
will flash for approximately a minute and then
Example: current tire pressure display remain continuously illuminated. This
For information on the message display, refer sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
to the "Checking the tire pressure electroni- cle is started as long as the malfunction
cally" section (Y page 286). exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect
Important safety notes or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
G WARNING reasons, including the installation of incom-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), patible replacement or alternate tires or
should be checked at least once every two wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
Wheels and tires

weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure from functioning properly. Always check the
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
on the Tire and Loading Information placard or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres- ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires
sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
your vehicle has tires of a different size than function properly.
the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, the tire It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure label, you should determine the pressure to that recommended for cold tires
proper tire pressure for those tires. which is suitable for the operating situation
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has (Y page 281). Note that the correct tire pres-
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sure for the current operating situation must
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.
sure telltale when one or more of your tires If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, warning threshold for the warning message is
when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, aligned to the reference values taught-in.
you should stop and check your tires as soon Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjust-
as possible, and inflate them to the proper ing the pressure of the cold tires
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- (Y page 287). The current pressures are
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can saved as new reference values. As a result, a
lead to tire failure. warning message will appear if the tire pres-
sure drops significantly.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
handling and stopping ability. Please note that of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire the notes on the recommended tire pressure
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- (Y page 281).
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
underinflation has not reached the level to you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
Z
286 Tire pressure
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the Checking the tire pressure electroni-
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the cally
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
sudden steering movements.
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 127).
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-
ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-
ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.
the warning lamp flashes or lights up indi- X Press the 9 or : button to select
cates whether a tire pressure is too low or the Tire Pressure.

Pressure
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: X Press the a button.
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the The current tire pressure of each tire is
tire pressure on one or more tires is signif- shown in the multifunction display.
icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is If the vehicle has been parked for over
not malfunctioning. 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a displayed after driving a few
minute and then remains lit constantly, the minutes message appears.
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
monitor automatically detects new wheels or
i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes- new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Wheels and tires
the tire pressure value to the individual

Further information can be found on wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure
(Y page 211). Monitor Active message is shown instead
If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures
it may take more than 10 minutes for the tire are already being monitored.
pressure warning lamp to inform you of the
malfunction. When the malfunction has been Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes sages
out after a few minutes of driving.
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
The tire pressure values indicated by the on- loss in a tire, a warning message is shown in
board computer may differ from those meas- the multifunction display and the yellow tire
ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. pressure monitor warning lamp comes on.
The tire pressures shown by the on-board
RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure
computer refer to those measured at sea
level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val- message appears in the multifunction dis-
ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higher play, the tire pressure in at least one tire is
than those shown by the on-board computer. too low. Correct the tire pressure at the
In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. next opportunity.
RIf the Check Tires message appears in the
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interference from radio trans- multifunction display, the tire pressure in at
mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, least one tire has dropped significantly.
two-way radios) that may be being operated Check the tires.
in or near the vehicle. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display,
the tire pressure in at least one tire has
dropped suddenly. Check the tires.
Tire pressure 287
Observe the instructions and safety notes in after driving a few minutes mes-
the display messages in the "Tires" section sage.
(Y page 211). X Press the : button.
i If the wheel positions are rotated, the tire The Use Current Pressures as New
pressure may be displayed for the wrong Reference Values message appears in
positions. This is rectified after a few the multifunction display.
minutes of driving, and the tire pressures If you wish to confirm the restart:
are displayed for the correct positions.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
message appears in the multifunction dis-
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all play.
existing warning messages are deleted and After driving for a few minutes, the system
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses checks whether the current tire pressures
the currently set tire pressures as the refer- are within the specified range. The new tire
ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the pressures are then accepted as reference
tire pressure monitor will automatically values and monitored.
detect the new reference values after you
If you wish to cancel the restart:
have changed the tire pressure. However, you
can also define reference values manually as X Press the % button.
Wheels and tires

described here. The tire pressure monitor The tire pressure values stored at the last
then monitors the new tire pressure values. restart will continue to be monitored.
X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-
mended for the corresponding driving sit- Radio type approval for the tire pres-
uation on the Tire and Loading Information sure monitor
placard on the driver's side
B-pillar (Y page 281). Country Radio type approval number
Additional tire pressure values for different Brazil 1489-10-4415
operating conditions can also be found on Model: MRXMERCTX1
the tire pressure table on the inside of the
charge socket flap (Y page 281). Dubai TRA, Registered NO
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct 0016161/08
on all four wheels. TRA, Registered NO
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position ER0076990/11
2 in the ignition lock. Dealer NO: DA0047074/10
Morocco MR5526 ANRT 2010/
ing wheel to select the Serv. menu. 27/04/2010
MR6706 ANRT 2011/
Tire Pressure.
Pressure 17/11/2011
The multifunction display shows the cur- Philip- ESD-1105558C
rent tire pressure for the individual tires or pines
the Tire pressure will be displayed Serbia 011 12
Z
288 Loading the vehicle
Country Radio type approval number gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-
Singa- Compliance with IDA Standard pants and the load. You can also find
pore N0140-09 information about the maximum gross
axle weight rating on the front and rear
South TA-2008/1068
axle.
Africa TA-2011/1370
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried
by one axle (front or rear axle). Do not
Loading the vehicle exceed the maximum gross vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads weight or the maximum gross axle weight
rating for the front or rear axle.
G WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the Maximum permissible mass.
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
Wheels and tires
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by

exceeding the maximum load.
X Specification for maximum permissible

weight : is listed on the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
: B-pillar, driver's side load and luggage must not exceed the speci-
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show fied value.
the maximum possible load. i The specifications shown on the Tire and
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard Loading Information placard in the illustra-
is on B-pillar : on the driver's side. The tion are examples. The maximum permis-
Tire and Loading Information placard sible load is vehicle-specific and may devi-
shows the maximum permissible number ate from the data shown here. The maxi-
of occupants and the maximum permis- mum permissible load that applies for your
sible vehicle load. It also contains details vehicle can be found on your vehicle's Tire
of the tire sizes and corresponding pres- and Loading Information placard.
sures for tires mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
Loading the vehicle 289
Number of seats X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five
150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load capa-
Maximum number of seats : indicates the city calculated in step 4.
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustra-
Wheels and tires

tion are examples. The number of seats is
vehicle-specific and can differ from the
details shown. The number of seats in your
vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-
ing Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs.
Z
290 Loading the vehicle
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and different numbers of occupants. The following examples
use a maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard (Y page 289).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Step 1 Combined maximum 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
weight of occupants (680 kg) (680 kg) (680 kg)
and load (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)

Step 2 Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver
Wheels and tires
and occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
pants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 291

Step 3 Permissible load 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
(maximum gross (680 kg) (680 kg) (680 kg)
vehicle weight rating 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
from the Tire and = 750 lbs =960 lbs 1350 lbs
Loading Information (340 kg) (435 kg) (612 kg)
placard minus the
gross weight of all
occupants)
Vehicle identification plate

When you have calculated the total load, you
should make sure that the gross vehicle
weight rating and the gross axle weight rating
are not exceeded. Details can be found on the
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 288).
Wheels and tires

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating: the gross
weight of the vehicle, all passengers and the
load must not exceed the permissible gross
vehicle weight rating. Maximum tire load : is the maximum per-
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the missible weight for which the tire is approved.
maximum permissible weight that can be car- i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
ried by one axle (front or rear axle). specific and may deviate from the values in
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the illustration.
the maximum permissible values, have your
loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants,
load) weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Maximum load rating Overview of Tire Quality Grading
Standards
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissi-
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 288).
Z
292 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are Traction

U.S. government specifications. Their pur-
pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia- G WARNING
ble information on tire performance data. tire The traction grade assigned to this tire is
manufacturers have to grade tires using three based on straight-ahead braking traction
performance factors: tread wear :, tire trac- tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
tion ; and heat resistance =. These regu- nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
lations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, acteristics.
all tires sold in North America are provided
with the corresponding quality grading mark- The traction grades from highest to lowest
ings on the sidewall of the tire. are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
All passenger car tires must conform to the the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
statutory safety requirements in addition to measured under controlled conditions on
these grades. specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
Quality grades can be found, where applica-
traction performance.
ble, on the tire sidewall between the tread
shoulder and maximum tire width. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfa-
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- ces.
specific and may deviate from the values in You should pay special attention to road con-
Wheels and tires
the illustration. ditions when temperatures are around the

For example: freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
Treadwear Traction Temperature tread depth of in (4 mm) for all four winter
200 AA A tires (Y page 280) to maintain normal driving
characteristics in winter. Winter tires can
reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
Treadwear surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
The braking distance is still much further than
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating on surfaces that are not icy or covered with
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. government course. For example, a tire ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage
graded 150 would wear one and one-half to the drive train.
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100.
Temperature
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how- G WARNING
ever, and may depart significantly from the The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
norm due to variations in driving habits, ser- lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
vice practices and differences in road char- not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
acteristics and climate conditions. tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C. They represent the tire's resistance to
Tire labeling 293
the generation of heat and its ability to dissi- D Load index (Y page 295)
pate heat when tested under controlled con- E Tire name
ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
the material of the tire to degenerate and ate from the data in the example.
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance which Tire size designation, load-bearing
all passenger car tires must meet under the capacity and speed rating
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Tire labeling
Overview of tire labeling
Wheels and tires

: Tire width
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
= Tire code
? Rim diameter
A Load bearing index
B Speed rating
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
may not contain any letters or may contain
one letter that precedes the size description.
The following markings are on the tire in addition to If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
the tire name (sales designation) and the manu- tion (as shown above): these are passenger
facturer's name: vehicle tires according to European manufac-
: Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard turing standards.
(Y page 297) If "P" precedes the size description: these are
; DOT tire Identification Number passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
(Y page 295) manufacturing standards.
= Maximum tire load (Y page 291) If "LT" precedes the size description: these
? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 284) are light truck tires according to U.S. manu-
A Manufacturer facturing standards.
B Tire material (Y page 296) If "T" precedes the size description: compact
C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa- emergency wheels with high tire pressure
city and speed rating (Y page 293)
Z
294 Tire labeling
that are only designed for temporary use in an Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
emergency. approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire load rating and speed rating required for
tire width in millimeters. your vehicle.
Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the
Regardless of the speed rating, always
size ratio between the tire height and tire
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and
width and is shown in percent. The aspect
adapt your driving style to the traffic condi-
ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by
tions.
the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. Summer tires
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents Index Speed rating
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires. Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the man- S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diam-
eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Wheels and tires
rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in

inches (in). V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
is a numerical code that specifies the maxi-
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
specified load limit. The maximum permissi-
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
the driver's side (Y page 288).
Example: RTires with a maximum speed of over
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can size description, depending on the manu-
bear. For further information on the maximum facturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
tire load in kilograms and pounds, see The service specification is made up of
(Y page 291). load-bearing index A and speed rating B.
For further information on the load-bearing RIf the size description of your tire includes
index, see "Load index" (Y page 295). "ZR" and there are no service specifica-
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order to
approved maximum speed of the tire. find out the maximum speed.
G WARNING If a service specification is available, the
maximum speed is limited according to the
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
speed rating in the service specification.
city and the approved maximum speed could
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The
is a risk of accident.
letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The
Tire labeling 295
maximum speed of the tire is limited to Load index

186 mph (300 km/h).
RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR". The service specifica-
tion must be given in brackets. Example:
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)"
indicates that the maximum speed of the
tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the
tire manufacturer about the maximum
speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
In addition to the load bearing index, load
Index Speed rating index : may be imprinted after the letters
Q M+S4 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) that identify speed index B on the sidewall of
the tire (Y page 293).
T M+S4 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard
H M+S4 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
load (SL) tire
Wheels and tires

V M+S4 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
tire
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide RLight Load: represents a light load tire
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In RC, D, E: represents a load range that
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires depends on the maximum load that the tire
also have the i snowflake symbol on can carry at a certain pressure
the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill
the requirements of the Rubber Manufac-
turers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the
tire traction on snow. They have been espe-
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
cially developed for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 100mph
(160km/h).
The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-
tory may be higher than the maximum speed
that the electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 303).
Further information about reading tire data Canadian tire regulations prescribe that every
can be obtained from any qualified specialist manufacturer of new tires or retreader has to
workshop. imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall.
4 Or M+S i for winter tires.
Z
296 Definition of terms for tires and loading
The TIN is a unique identification number. The Tire characteristics

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retread-
ers to inform purchasers of recalls and other
safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible
for the purchaser to easily identify the affec-
ted tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi-
cation code ;, tire size =, tire type code ?
and manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : indicates that the tire complies
with the requirements of the Canadian trans-
port ministry. This information describes the type of tire
Manufacturer identification code: manu- cord and the number of layers in sidewall :
facturer identification code ; provides and under tire tread ;.
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires,
Wheels and tires
see (Y page 278). Definition of terms for tires and load-

Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. ing
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
Tire ply composition and material
by the manufacturer as a code to describe used
specific characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture Describes the number of plies or the number
A provides information about the age of a of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
tire. The first and second positions represent tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
the week of manufacture, starting with "01" nylon, polyester and other materials.
for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of manufacture.
For example, a tire that is marked with Bar
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
2008. per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of
the Canadian Transport Ministry.
Normal occupant weight

The number of occupants for which the vehi-
cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms
(150 lbs).
Definition of terms for tires and loading 297
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- Speed rating

ards
The speed rating is part of the tire identifica-
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tion. It specifies the speed range for which the
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction tire is approved.
and temperature characteristics. The quality
grading assessment is made by the manufac-
turer following specifications from the US GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
government. The ratings are molded into the
The gross vehicle weight comprises the
sidewall of the tire.
weight of the vehicle including tools, acces-
sories installed, occupants and luggage. The
gross vehicle weight must not exceed the
Recommended tire pressures
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) as speci-
The recommended tire pressure applies to fied on the vehicle identification plate on the
the tires mounted at the factory. B-pillar on the driver's side.
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressure for cold
tires, the maximum permissible load and the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
maximum permissible vehicle speed. The GVWR is the maximum permitted gross
Wheels and tires

The tire pressure table contains the recom- weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the
mended pressures for cold tires for various vehicle including all accessories, occupants
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and and luggage). The gross vehicle weight rating
speed conditions. is specified on the vehicle identification plate
on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Increased vehicle weight due to

optional equipment Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The combined weight of all standard and The maximum weight is the sum of:
optional equipment available for the vehicle, Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
regardless of whether it is actually installed
Rthe weight of the accessories
on the vehicle or not.
Rthe load limit
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
Rim equipment
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire
is mounted.
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure
is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva-
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
lent of 1 bar.
rating. The actual load on an axle must not
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The max-
imum gross axle weight rating can be found
Load index
on the vehicle identification plate on the B-
pillar on the driver's side. In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
Z
298 Definition of terms for tires and loading
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa- Tire pressure of cold tires
city more precisely.
The tires are cold:
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires
Curb weight out of direct sunlight for at least 3 hours
and
The weight of a vehicle with standard equip-
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
ment but without passengers and luggage.
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Maximum load rating

Tread
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissi-
ble weight for which the tire is approved. The part of the tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Maximum permissible tire pressure

Bead
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one
tire. The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
Wheels and tires
Maximum load on one tire coming loose from the wheel rim.
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated

by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle Sidewall
by two.
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
Aspect ratio that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
Relationship between tire height and tire optional extras, such as high-performance
width in percent. brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-
voltage battery, are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an
outward force to each square inch of the tire's TIN (Tire Identification Number)
surface. The tire pressure is specified in This is a unique identifier which can be used
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only example for a product recall, and thus identify
be corrected when the tires are cold. the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
type code and the manufacturing date.
Changing a wheel 299
Load bearing index The wheel brakes or suspension components

may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
The load bearing index is a code that contains
dent.
the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions.
Traction
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
Traction is the result of friction between the monitor, electronic components are loca-
tires and the road surface. ted in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used
near the valve. This could damage the elec-
Treadwear indicators tronic components.
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis- Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is cialist workshop.
level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in Always pay attention to the instructions and
(1.6 mm) has been reached. safety notes when changing a wheel
(Y page 299).
Occupant distribution The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Wheels and tires

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
their designated seating positions. has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
Total load limit If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg can rotate the wheels according to the inter-
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book
the vehicle. in your vehicle documents. If no warranty
book is available, the tires should be rotated
every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
Changing a wheel 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do
not change the direction of wheel rotation.
Flat tire
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
You can find information on what to do in the the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
event of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section is rotated. Check the tire pressure and reac-
(Y page 264). Information on driving with tires tivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary.
with run-flat characteristics in the event of a
flat tire can be found under "Tires with run-flat
characteristics" (Y page 264). Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
Rotating the wheels
of hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben-
G WARNING efits if the correct direction of rotation is
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may observed.
severely impair the driving characteristics if An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
the wheels or tires have different dimensions. its correct direction of rotation.
Z
300 Changing a wheel
Storing wheels rolling away, for example when changing a

wheel.
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
X Fold both plates upwards :.
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
tires against oil and grease. X Fold out lower plate ;.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the openings in base plate =.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Apply the electric parking brake manually
(Y page 145).
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.
X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to P.
X Switch off the drive system.
Securing the vehicle on level ground
On level ground: place chocks or other
Wheels and tires
X
lock.
suitable items under the front and rear of
X If included in the vehicle equipment,
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
remove the tire-change tool kit from the wheel you wish to change.
vehicle.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

rolling away
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients

X On light downhill gradients: place
chocks or other suitable items in front of
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit G WARNING
(Y page 264). If you do not position the jack correctly at the
The folding wheel chock is an additional appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
safety measure to prevent the vehicle from jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
Changing a wheel 301
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
must be positioned vertically, directly under large, load-bearing underlay must be used.
the jacking point of the vehicle. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay
must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
! Position a suitable jack correctly on the Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
intended jacking points. If you fail to posi- objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
tion the jack correctly, the vehicle may be jack will not be able to achieve its load-
damaged. bearing capacity due to the restricted
The jacking points are recesses in the lower height.
door sill. They can only be seen from under- Rmake sure that the distance between the
neath. There is one located behind each of underside of the tires and the ground does
the front wheel arches and in front of the not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
rear wheel arches. Rdo not place your hands or feet under the
Position the jack in the jacking points so raised vehicle.
that when viewed from the side, the jack is Rdo not lie under the vehicle.
in the vertical position.
Rdo not start the electric motor when the
! Position a suitable jack only on the jack- vehicle is raised.
ing points intended for this purpose. Rdo not open or close the doors or the tail-
Wheels and tires

Never position the jack on the high-voltage gate when the vehicle is raised.
battery. Do not jack up the vehicle on the Rmake sure that no persons are present in
high-voltage battery. There is otherwise a the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
risk of damaging the high-voltage battery.
Also observe the notes in the "Changing a
wheel" section.
Observe the following when raising the
vehicle:
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-
rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-
cle raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold
X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
the wheel you wish to change by about one
is being changed. It is not suited for per-
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
forming maintenance work under the vehi-
pletely.
cle.
Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.
Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from
rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disen-
gage the parking brake while the vehicle is
raised.
Z
302 Changing a wheel
Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
X Unscrew the wheel bolts.
X Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel

The jacking points are located just behind the G WARNING
wheel housings of the front wheels and just in Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
front of the wheel housings of the rear wheels wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
(arrows). bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
Wheels and tires
specialist workshop immediately. Have the

damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
X Position jack = at jacking point ;. over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and

safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-
tion (Y page 299).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly respective wheel.
beneath the jacking point.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits the wheel securely against the wheel hub
completely on jacking point ; and the while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is
raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.
Wheel and tire combinations 303
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-

wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:
to A). The specified tightening torque is
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
tools in the vehicle again.
X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-
ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact (Y page 281).
surfaces. i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all
X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and wheels mounted must be equipped with
push it on. functioning sensors.
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-
ger-tight.
Wheel and tire combinations
Lowering the vehicle General notes
Wheels and tires

G WARNING ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts ommends that you only use tires and
and bolts are not tightened to the specified wheels which have been approved by
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-
Have the tightening torque immediately cle.
checked at a qualified specialist workshop These tires have been specially adapted for
after a wheel is changed. use with the control systems, such as ABS
or ESP, and are marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
may only be used on wheels that have been
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-
X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are noise emissions or fuel consumption, may
visible. otherwise be adversely affected. In addi-
X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-
once again standing firmly on the ground. sion variations could cause the tires to
X Place the jack to one side. come into contact with the bodywork and
axle components. This could result in dam-
age to the tires or the vehicle.
Z
304 Wheel and tire combinations
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for tire. Observe the "Tires with run-flat char-
damage resulting from the use of tires, acteristics" section (Y page 264).
wheels or accessories other than those tes-
i The following pages contain information
ted and approved.
on approved wheel rim and tire sizes for
Information on tires, wheels and approved equipping your vehicle with winter tires.
combinations can be obtained from any Winter tires are not available at the factory
qualified specialist workshop. as standard equipment or optional extras.
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- If you want to equip your vehicle with
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since pre- approved winter tires, it may be necessary
vious damage cannot always be detected to obtain wheel rims in the corresponding
on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes- size. The size of the approved winter tires
Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if may differ from the standard tires. This is
retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount dependent on the model and the equip-
used tires if you have no information about ment installed at the factory.
their previous usage. The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
Overview of abbreviations used in the follow- information, can be obtained at a qualified
ing tire tables: specialist workshop.
RBA: both axles i Not all wheel and tire combinations are
Wheels and tires
RFA: front axle available at the factory for all countries.

RRA: rear axle
The recommended pressures for various
operating conditions can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
with the recommended tire pressures on
the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the
charge socket flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire
pressures under various operating conditions
(Y page 281).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-
nance recommendations of the tire manufac-
turer in the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment always
equip the vehicle with:
Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/
right)
Rwith tires of the same type (summer tires,
tires with run-flat characteristics, winter
tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat
Wheel and tire combinations 305
Tires
B-Class Electric Drive
All-weather tires Alloy wheels

BA 225/50 R17 94 H5 7 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5
BA 225/45 R18 95 H5, 6 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44
Wheels and tires
5 Available as MOExtended tires.

6 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
Z
306
307

Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 308
Identification plates ......................... 308
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 309
Vehicle data ...................................... 311
Technical data
308 Identification plates
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all

functions.
Example: vehicle identification plate
i Read the information on qualified special- ; VIN
ist workshops: (Y page 24). = Paint code
i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-
Information regarding technical data tion plate is used only as an example. This
data is different for every vehicle and can
General information deviate from the data shown here. You can
i The data stated here specifically refers to find the data applicable to your vehicle on
a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult the vehicle identification plate.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
levels. VIN
Technical data
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
cle identification number (VIN)
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-

most position.
X Fold up floor covering : in front of the
right-hand front seat.
You will see VIN ;.
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle
X Open the driver's door.
identification plate (Y page 308).
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Electric motor number

The electric motor number can be found at
the bottom of the electric motor. More infor-
Service products and filling capacities 309
mation can be obtained from any authorized MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
Mercedes-Benz Center. approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Service products and filling capaci- Brake fluid

ties
G WARNING
Important safety notes The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
G WARNING
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
Service products may be poisonous and haz- fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. brake system when the brakes are applied
Comply with instructions on the use, storage hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
and disposal of service products on the labels There is a risk of an accident.
of the respective original containers. Always You should have the brake fluid renewed at
store service products sealed in their original the specified intervals.
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children. When handling brake fluid, observe the
important safety notes on service products
H Environmental note (Y page 309).
Dispose of service products in an environ- The brake fluid change intervals can be found
mentally responsible manner. in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
Service products include the following:
Technical data
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
Information about approved brake fluid can
RCoolant be obtained at any qualified specialist work-
RBrake fluid shop or on the Internet at:
RWindshield washer fluid http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
RClimate control system refrigerant i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at
Components and service products must be a qualified specialist workshop and the
matched. You should therefore only use prod- replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
ucts that have been tested and approved by Booklet.
Mercedes-Benz.
Information about tested and approved prod-
ucts can be obtained from an authorized Coolant
Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at Important safety notes
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip- freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the
tion on the containers: following tasks:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) Rcorrosion protection
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Rantifreeze protection
Other designations or recommendations indi- Rraising the boiling point
cate a level of quality or a specification in i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-
accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g. led with a coolant mixture that ensures
Z
310 Service products and filling capacities
adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec- Washer fluid

tion.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You G WARNING
could otherwise damage the engine. Windshield washer concentrate is highly flam-
Further information on coolants can be mable. If it comes into contact with hot com-
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications ponents in the front compartment, it may
for Service Products, MB Specifications for ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Inter- Make sure that no windshield washer con-
net at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or
even in countries where high temperatures
MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid
prevail.
could damage the plastic lenses of the
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not headlamps.
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating. ! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the
If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in
level sensor may be damaged.
the correct concentration, the boiling point of
the coolant will be around 266 (130 ). ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra- washer fluid should be mixed together. The
tion in the engine cooling system should: spray nozzles may otherwise become
Technical data
blocked.
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to When handling washer fluid, observe the
approximately -35 (-37 ). important safety notes on service products
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection (Y page 309).
down to -49 (-45 )). Heat will otherwise At temperatures above freezing:
not be dissipated as effectively. X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.
amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion MB SummerFit.
inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
anticorrosion/antifreeze which has been
approved for Mercedes-Benz. At temperatures below freezing:
! The warranty is only valid if you add an X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which has of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-
been approved by Mercedes-Benz and if Fit.
the recommended mixture ratio is Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temper-
observed. ature.
RDown to 14 (10 ): mix 1 part MB Win-
terFit to 2 parts water.
RDown to 4 (20 ): mix 1 part MB Win-
terFit to 1 part water.
RDown to 20.2 (29 ): mix 2 parts MB
WinterFit to 1 part water.
Vehicle data 311
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB ? PAG oil part number

SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer A Type of refrigerant
fluid all year round.
Warning symbol : advises you about:
Rpossible dangers
Climate control system refrigerant Rhaving service work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop
The climate control system of your vehicle is Filling capacities
filled with refrigerant R134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant All models Capacity
type used can be found on the radiator cross Refrigerant 22.9 0.4 oz
member.
(650 10 g)
! Only the refrigerant R134a and the PAG
oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be PAG oil 4.2 oz
used. The approved PAG oil may not be (120 g)
mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
approved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-
wise, the climate control system may be Vehicle data
damaged.
General notes
Service work, such as topping-up refrigerant
or replacing components, may only be carried Please note that for the specified vehicle
data:
Technical data
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand- Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of
ard J639, must be adhered to. -tires
Always have all work on the climate control -load
system carried out at an authorized - condition of the suspension
Mercedes-Benz Center.
- optional equipment
Refrigerant instruction label Roptional equipment reduces the maximum

payload.
Dimensions and weights
Example: refrigerant instruction label

: Warning symbol
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable standards
Z
312 Vehicle data
Opening dimen- High-voltage bat-

sions tery
: Maximum head- 75.3 in (1912 mm) Charge time with approx. 5 h
room 240 V (32 A)
; Opening height 79.5 in (2021 mm) Charge time with approx. 4 h
240 V (40 A)
Vehicle dimensions
The specified values for range depend on the
Vehicle length 171.6 in driving program selected and may vary as a
(4358 mm) result of:
Vehicle height 63.1 in (1604 mm) Rhigher and lower outside temperatures
Rthe style of driving
Vehicle width 79.1 in (2010 mm)
Ractivated electrical consumers
including exterior
mirrors
Vehicle width with- 71.3 in (1812 mm)
out exterior mirrors
Wheelbase 106.3 in
(2699 mm)
Turning radius 36.1 ft (11.0 m)
Technical data
Vehicle weights
Maximum allowa- 4784 lb (2170 kg)
ble gross mass
Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg)
load
Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg)
High-voltage bat-
tery
Model Lithium-ion
Energy content 28.0 kWh
Range (according to approx. 82 miles
EPA) (132 km)
Charge time with approx. 28 h
110-120 V (12 A)

Mercedes Benz B-Class Electric Drive User Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Mercedes Benz B-Class Electric Drive User Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

B-Class Electric Drive Operator's Manual B-Class Electric Drive

Order no. 65155605 13 Part no. 2425842200 Edition C 2014

! Notes on material damage alert you to

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 29

Introduction ......................................... 19 Safety ................................................... 39

Opening and closing ........................... 71

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 85

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 97

Climate control ................................. 113

Driving and parking .......................... 125

On-board computer and displays .... 171

Stowage and features ...................... 227

Maintenance and care ...................... 251

Breakdown Assistance ..................... 263

Wheels and tires ............................... 277

Technical data ................................... 307

1, 2, 3 ... Setting the center air vents ........... 123

Center console Climate control

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST D

Doors Driving tips

ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- Glove box ........................................... 229

Display message ............................ 209 K

Locking centrally Memory function ................................. 95

Operation ......................................... 49 Overhead control panel ...................... 36

Power washers .................................. 257 Rear-view mirror

S Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-

Digital ............................................ 177 Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 80

Bar (definition) ............................... 296 Summer tires ................................. 280

Protection of the environment manner. Contact a qualified specialist work-

Automatic switching off of the vehicle's

Automatic switching off of the charging Trailer tow hitch

Always have the following work carried out at 98 Vanderhoof Avenue

State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that

Function Page Function Page

C Overhead control panel 36 K Opens the hood 252

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel

Center console, lower section

Overhead control panel

Function Page Function Page

Door control panel

Useful information .............................. 40

Useful information reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants

RChild restraint system

Important safety notes gered at all in the event of an accident with a

Restraint system warning lamp

RChildren in a child restraint system:

The shoulder section of the seat belt must

est possible distance to the air bags

Window curtain air bags : are integrated

Make sure that the front-passenger front air

If OCS determines that:

G DANGER facing child restraint system must, as far as

this case, the front-passenger front air bag

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning people with asthma or other respiratory prob-

Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- the respective front-passenger seat

If Emergency Tensioning Devices or air bags

Rfrontal collision G WARNING

If the rear backrest is not engaged and

Child-proof locks G WARNING

Child-proof locks for the rear doors Pets in the vehicle

switches, for example.